Skip to main content

Full text of "Knitting without "specimens"; the modern book of school knitting and crochet"

See other formats


. 



ALBERT R. MANN 
LIBRARY 

AT 

CORNELL UNIVERSITY 



Cornell University Library 
TT 820.C62 




p. 11 Cornell University 
10 M Library 



The original of this book is in 
the Cornell University Library. 

There are no known copyright restrictions in 
the United States on the use of the text. 



http://www.archive.org/details/cu31924003593427 



KNITTING WITHOUT "SPECIMENS" 




Knitted Hug-Me-Tight or Bolero. 



{Frotttispiect) 



KNITTING 

WITHOUT "SPECIMENS" 

THE MODERN BOOK OF SCHOOL 
KNITTING AND CROCHET 



BY 

ELLEN P. CLAYDON 

HEAD MISTRESS OF CHUCKERY COUNCIL SCHOOL, WALSALL J AUTHOR 
OF " HANDWORK AND NEEDLEWORK " 

AND 

C. A. CLAYDON 

SEWING MISTRESS, TANTARRA STREET MIXED SCHOOL, 
WALSALL 



NEW YORK 
E. P. DUTTON & COMPANY 
681 FIFTH AVENUE 

LL. 



Printed by 
Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons, Ltd., London 



PREFACE. 



Many books have been published during the last few years dealing with modern 
methods in the teaching of sewing. Fewer attempts, however, have been hitherto 
made to deal adequately with the teaching of knitting and crochet work as sections 
of Needlework Teaching, and as enjoyable forms of Handwork for girls. 

These occupations are, nevertheless, not only very useful branches of Needle- 
work, but among the most attractive subjects to girls in the whole curriculum. 
Moreover, such work as knitting and crochet, in which they are instinctively 
interested, is certainly that which is most likely to survive their school days. It 
is wise, therefore, to feed the interest of the girls in these useful occupations, and 
to meet their eager demands for help. We may then expect that their education 
in this direction will become a " self-feeding fire," carrying them far, and not only 
providing delightful and healthy occupations for leisure hours in after-school days, 
but proving, further, of great social service to others. 

The revised " Suggestions for the Teaching of Needlework " advances yet another 
argument in support of Knitting as an occupation, which may well be quoted 
here : — " Facility in Knitting can only be acquired early, and in old age or 
ill-health has a value distinct from that of the garments produced." 

The subject, however, should be so taught that the maximum of mental develop- 
ment is obtained from it, as well as the maximum of training in manual dexterity. 
The necessity for the measurement of sizes, for the selection of suitable materials, 
for calculations of quantities and cost, ensures that the girl must think in order 
to act effectively. The methods suggested in this book aim, therefore, at uniting 
educational value with social utility. 

Many schools have in times past spent much time on knitting " Specimens," 
e.g., a square of plain knitting to show chain edge — -a specimen of work to show 
narrowings at the back of a stocking — a knitted heel, etc. These examples have 
been worked by the girls over and over again, long after they have become quite 
proficient in the point being taught. Pounds of wool and knitting cotton have 
been wasted in this manner, to serve no useful end. Worse still, the lack of purpose 
in the work served to kill the child's interest instead of stimulating it. In the 
recently issued report by the Chief Woman Inspector on the teaching of 
Needlework, she condemns in no uncertain manner this wastage of effort and 
material on specimens. With regard to this point the report states : — " The 



vi PREFACE. 

working of ' Specimens ' should be discouraged. The effect of ' Specimen ' work 
on Needlework teaching has been disastrous." 

The scheme of Knitting and Crochet suggested in this book endeavours to meet 
the foregoing criticism, by providing that girls shall learn all varieties of stitches 
while making useful articles and garments. The selection of such articles for 
each class has been guided by the interests of the child at each successive stage. 
The little girl's constructive instinct has its first outlet in making something for 
her doll and in decorating her doll's house. Later, she is interested also in making 
things for her own use and the use of her relations and friends. The scheme aims, 
therefore, at embracing within its scope those things in her school and home 
environment that are of living interest to the child. This selection and making 
of things that are vitally interesting to her will stimulate immensely the girl's 
out-of-school observations. She will be quick to seize upon new patterns of knit- 
ting in shop windows, and will observe every knitted and crocheted hat, bonnet, 
coat, or wrap in the school playground, in order to plan one to suit her own needs. 

Lastly, the book aims at producing a spirit of artistic appreciation, by encourag- 
ing the selection of materials and colours which are suitable and in good taste ; 
such training cannot fail to exercise a refining and beneficial influence on girls, 
whatever may be their vocations in adult life. 

E. P. CLAYDON. 
C. A. CLAYDON. 



CONTENTS. 



PAGE 

Preface ............ v 

GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 
A: — Knitting 

METHOD OF HOLDING WOOL ........ 13 

MAKING A SLIP LOOP ......... 13 

CASTING-ON ........... 15 

PLAIN KNITTING .......... 18 

PURLING ........... 20 

CASTING-OFF . . . . . . . . . . .21 

COUNTING ROWS AND ROUNDS ....... 24 

JOINING WOOL .......... 27 

PICKING UP STITCHES ......... 28 

DECREASINGS .......... 30 

INCREASINGS ........... 31 

B. — Crochet 

METHOD OF HOLDING WORK . . . . . . . .34 

MAKING A SLIP LOOP ......... 34 

CHAIN STITCH .......... 34 

DOUBLE CROCHET .......... 36 

TREBLE STITCH .......... 36 

DOUBLE TREBLE STITCH ......... 36 

SINGLE STITCH .......... 37 

JOINING WOOL .......... 38 

TASSELS, POMPOMS, AND FRINGING ....... 39 

WINDING WOOL .......... 42 

SEWING TOGETHER PARTS OF GARMENTS ...... 42 

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ......... 42 

ABBREVIATIONS .......... 42 

WOOLCRAFT ........... 43 

BRITISH MANUFACTURERS AND WOOLS : QUALITIES, PRICES, AND USES . 44 

GERMAN WOOLS .......... 49 



Standard I and Upper Infants. 

1. DOLL'S MUFF KNITTED ON BONE NEEDLES 

2 (A). DOLL'S SCARF KNITTED ON BONE NEEDLES . 

2 (b). FULL-SIZED SCARF ON BONE NEEDLES, TO FIT THE CHILD 

3. DOLL'S SHAWL KNITTED ON BONE NEEDLES 

4. DOLL'S SCARF ON STEEL NEEDLES . . . . . 



50 
52 
52 
52 
53 



vu 



Vlll 



CONTENTS. 



5. ROLLED PINCUSHION .... 

6. QUILT FOR DOLL'S BED .... 

7. PURSE WITH NECK-CORD FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR 

8. PURSE WITH HANDLES FOR CHILD'S OWN USE 

9. KNITTED IRON-HOLDER .... 

10. PINCUSHION COVER .... 

11. WASHING GLOVE ..... 

12. DOLL'S MUFF WITH KNITTED NECK SUPPORT 

13. DOLL'S WOOLLEN SHOE .... 

14. BABY'S KNITTED SHOE .... 

15. KNITTED TOY REINS .... 

16. „ „ ,, (ALTERNATIVE SHAPE) 



Standard II. 



1. 

2. 

3 

3 

4. 

5. 

6. 

7. 

8. 

9. 
10. 
11 
12. 
13 
14 
14 
15 
15 
16 
16 
17 



'KNITTED BOOK MARKER WITH FRINGED ENDS 

COVER FOR NEEDLE-BOOK 
(A). ANTIMACASSAR FOR DOLL'S HOUSE 
(B). FULL-SIZED ANTIMACASSAR FOR HOUSEHOLD USE 

DOLL'S SOFA RUG . 

DOLL'S DUTCH BONNET . 

COSY FOR DOLL'S TEAPOT 

DOLL'S VEST 

DOLL'S KNITTED HAT 

DOLL'S JERSEY 

DOLL'S KILTED WOOLLEN SKIRT 

DOLL'S KNITTED COAT (jf-LENGTH) 

DOLL'S KNITTED PETTICOAT 

DOLL'S SLIPPER WITH LEATHER SOLE 
(A). KNITTED RUG FOR DOLL'S HOUSE 
(B). FULL-SIZED RUG FOR HOUSEHOLD USE 
(a). DOLL'S CROCHETED SHAWL 
(b). FULL-SIZED CROCHETED SHAWL . 
(A). DOLL'S CROCHETED HAT 
(b). FULL-SIZED CROCHETED HAT TO FIT CHILD OF TEN 

CROCHETED PURSE FOR CHILD'S OWN USE . 



Standard III. 



1. SMALL BOY'S KNITTED BRACES . 

2. COLOURED CASE FOR CHILD'S BALL . 

3. BABY GIRL'S KNITTED STAYS . 

4. DOLL'S SCARF KNITTED ON THREE NEEDLES 

5. MARBLE BAG FOR CHILD'S BROTHER . 

6. LUNCH BAG FOR CHILD'S OWN USE . 

7. DOLL'S MUFF ..... 

8. KNITTED CUFFS FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR . 



CONTENTS. 



9 (a). doll s petticoat, knitted in strips . 

9 (b). petticoat, knitted in strips, for child's own wear 

10. knitted tea-cosy ..... 

11. doll's jersey on three needles . 

12. doll's hat . ....... 

13. knitted hat for child's own wear 

14. tie knitted in spider pattern 
15 (a), doll's crocheted 'bonnet 

15 (b). FULL-SIZED BONNET FOR CHILD OF EIGHT OR NINE 

16 (a). DOLL'S CROCHETED PETTICOAT 
16 (B). FULL-SIZED CROCHETED PETTICOAT FOR CHILD OF TEN OR ELEVEN 

17. CROCHETED CUFFS FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR 

18. CROCHETED HAIR-BAND FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR . 



Standard IV. 



1. triangular head-wrap .... 

2. baby's first vest ..... 

3. child's vest ...... 

4. striped silk tie, or sports tie in club colours 

5. baby's belt ...... 

6. knitted scarf ...... 

7. sleeping sock ...... 

8. lady's bedroom slipper .... 

9. woollen bonnet for child's own wear 

10. woollen hat knitted on three needles 

11. small girl's crocheted stays 

12. crocheted hair-band for girl's own wear . 

13. crocheted shawl (simple pattern) 

14. girl's crocheted hat (simple pattern) . 

15. girl's crocheted bonnet (simple pattern) . 



Standard V. 



1. CHILD'S KNITTED STOLE OR MUFFLER 

2. CHILD'S KNITTED MUFF .... 

3. BABY'S KNITTED PETTICOAT 

4. BABY'S GAITER ..... 

5. KNITTED HUG-ME-TIGHT OR BOLERO . 
6 (A). RULES FOR KNITTING AND TURNING HEELS 
6 (b). CHILD'S SOCK ..... 

7. SHAWL OR WRAP OF SHETLAND WOOL 

8. GIRL'S CROCHETED PETTICOAT (SIMPLE PATTERN 

9. CROCHETED SCARF .... 

10. VESTETTE, OR SHAPED NECK-WRAP, IN CROCHET 

11. CROCHETED SILK NECK-WRAP . 

12. CROCHETED TIE FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR 



CONTENTS. 



Standard VI. 



1 (a), stocking for child's own wear 
1 (b). stockings of different sizes . 
1 (c). RE- welting and re-footing of socks 

■2. GENTLEMEN'S RIBBED SOCK 

3. CHILD'S KNITTED JERSEY 

4. BABY'S KNITTED GLOVE . 

5. KNITTED LACE EDGING . 

6. BABY'S CROCHETED BONNET 

7. CROCHETED WOOLLEN HAT, WITH BRIM 

8. CROCHETED PETTICOAT 

9. CROCHETED CURTAIN HOLDER . 
10. CROCHETED SHAWL 



OR STOCKINGS 



PAGE 

157 
159 
160 
162 
164 
167 
170 
171 
172 
174 
176 
178 



Standard VII. 



1(A). GLOVE FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR 

1 (B). MITTEN FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR . 

2. BABY'S KNITTED COAT 

BABY'S BOOTEES .... 

BABY'S ORNAMENTAL SILK SOCK 

CROCHETED EGG-COSY . . . 

CROCHETED TEA-COSY 

). CROCHETED PERAMBULATOR COVER 



3. 

4. 
5. 

6. 

;7 . 

7 (b). CROCHETED COT COVER 
7 (c). CROCHETED SOFA RUG 

8. CROCHETED HUG-ME-TIGHT 

9. FIRST LACE EDGING IN CROCHET 

10. SECOND LACE EDGING IN CROCHET 

11. THIRD LACE EDGING IN CROCHET 



180 

183 
183 
186 
189 
192 
194 
195 
197 
197 
197 
202 
202 
203 



KNITTING WITHOUT 
"SPECIMENS." 

THE MODERN BOOK OF SCHOOL 
KNITTING AND CROCHET. 



GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS. 

I. — It will be observed that a very wide range of articles has been suggested 
ifor each Standard or Class. It is unlikely that any one girl will make all the 
articles given, but the syllabus for the class should, as the recent report on Needle- 
work Teaching suggests, provide a choice of garments. Each girl may then select 
-those which she requires, provided that she has not made such garments or articles 
before. The report adds : — " Variety of work is good both for the teacher and the 
class. The tradition that a child cannot be expected to make more than one 
garment a year is passing away." Each teacher will, of course, be guided also by 
-the interests and needs of her own particular girls and district, and. will find little 
difficulty in adding to the following syllabus, or modifying it to suit her own 
requirements. 

II. — In many cases, instructions are given for the knitting or crocheting of the 
.•article, both small size for the Doll or Doll's House, and full size. In lower classes, 
iull-sized garments, or even garments to fit the children themselves, are often too 
large for them to manipulate and also take too long. It is advisable, therefore, 
ior the majority of children in lower classes to knit or crochet small articles or 
garments for their dolls. Children who show exceptional facility should be en- 
couraged to attempt larger articles. Even in upper standards the teacher will 
sometimes find it useful, when the time is short, to teach the method of working 
by means of a small article. Every girl should, however, always keep in her 
arecord book the detailed instructions for making the article full size. 

III. — -In every case, the knitting or crochet will be done, after careful measure- 
ment by the children, of the size required to fit the child, doll, doll's house, etc., 
-for which the article is being made. Children will soon be able to make a fair 
■estimate of the number of stitches required for articles of given sizes. It is a good 
plan to keep at schooi a doll of suitable size, say 16 in. high, to which children 
■shall fit all their doll's garments. They will thus have a standard of comparison 
as a guide for their future work. Moreover, in the case of a very large class, a 
■teacher can more effectively teach a new stitch or method when all the children are 
working on articles to fit the same doll. All the doll's garments described in this 
lbook have been made to fit a doll 16 in. high from head to foot. The width across 

11 



12 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

the shoulders was 4 in., size round waist 8f in., length of arm 3£ in., skirt length 
5£ in., and measurement round head, as for a knitted tam-o'-shanter, 8 m - 

After the method of making a garment, e.g., a bonnet, has been grasped, children 
should be allowed to bring their own dolls ; they can then make the same garment 
a second time, estimating entirely for themselves, from knowledge previously 
gained, the number of stitches requisite to fit the respective dolls brought. In 
the case of the second article made, it is well to encourage the children to introduce 
variations in pattern from the teacher's type, thus giving scope for initiative and 
originality, and avoiding keeping all the girls at the same level. 

IV. — -A certain amount of co-operation is advisable, e.g., it is often helpful for 
older girls to sew together and decorate garments made in lower classes. This 
affords good social training. 

V. — The teacher should discuss with the girls the selection of suitable colours 
and materials for their work, and should let them calculate the cost of every article 
made. This is an educational aspect of the work which should not be neglected. 

VI. — If wool, needles, or crochet-hook are employed, coarser than those given 
in the directions, the number of stitches or chain should be diminished propor- 
tionately. Such a proceeding is sometimes useful in order to lessen or simplify 
the work in the case of backward children. 

It will be found that the knitting of individual children varies so widely in slack- 
ness or tightness, that the same number of stitches may produce pieces of knitting 
of very different sizes. The same variation occurs also in crochet. 

Therefore, in the instructions for every garment, the required width in inches 
has been given as well as the number of stitches or chain to commence with. The 
following plan may be adopted in estimating the exact number of stitches required 
in the case of individual knitters : Work a small piece of knitting of not less than 
1 in. in width. (Use the same size of needles and wool as those to be employed for 
the garment.) Count the number of stitches that have produced unstretched 
' knitting 1 in. in width. Multiply this number by the number of inches required 
for the width of the garment, and this will give the number of stitches to be cast on. 

The dimensions will also be found helpful in cases where teachers have not at 
their disposal the exact size of needles or wool advised in the instructions. Adopt 
the plan described above for estimating the number of stitches necessary. 

VII. — In teaching all new points in knitting, the teacher should demonstrate to- 
the whole class by means of large wooden knitting needles and thick rug wool, such 
as those shown in Fig. 5. A very coarse crochet hook and rug wool are also suitable 
for demonstrating points in crochet work. Another obvious method is to sketch 
the necessary diagrams boldly on the blackboard. 

VIII. — For convenience, directions concerning the fundamental processes of 
Knitting are collected in pages 13-33 ; those dealing with Crochet will be found on 
pages 34-8 ; and pages 39-42 are occupied with instructions on the making of 
Tassels, Pompoms, and Fringing. 



A.— KNITTING. 

METHOD OF HOLDING WOOL. 

Pass the wool over the first finger of the right hand, under the second and 
third fingers, and over the fourth finger, giving an additional twist round the last 
finger. (See Figs. 1 and 2.) 



UHHUHUIM^^HBg 



Fig. 1. Method of Holding Wool in Knitting. 
(Outside view as seen by an onlooker.) 

MAKING A SLIP LOOP. 

Take a knitting-needle in the right hand. Catch the wool in the left hand 
about 6 in. from the end, bring it forward between the first finger and the thumb, 
and pass it once completely round the thumb from left to right, crossing the wool 
as shown in Fig. 3. Pass the wool coming from the ball over the fingers of the 
right hand as described under " Method of Holding Wool." Pass the point of 
the needle under the loop. With the forefinger of the right hand, pass the wool 
round the point of the right-hand needle (Fig. 3), and draw the thread through 
the loop, thus 1 making another loop. Withdraw the thumb, and pull gently on 
the left-hand 'thread to tighten the stitch. (See Fig. 4.) 

13 



14 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




Fig. 2. Method of Holding Wool in Knitting. Inside Front. 
( View as seen by the worker, with the right hand raised as for 
slipping the wool over the right-hand needle with the first finger, 
showing also the twisting of the wool round the little finger.) 




(Step 1.) 



KNITTING. 



IS 




Fig. 4. Making a Slip Loop. [Step 2.) 



CASTING-ON. 

(a) First Method — Knitting-on. 

Make a slip loop as described above on one needle. ,Pass the needle to the 
left hand. Take a second needle in the right hand, and place the wool in position 
for knitting over the right-hand fingers, as before. Insert the point of the right- 
hand needle in the stitch, pass the wool round the point of this needle with the- 
forefinger of the right hand (Fig. 5 : Step 1), and draw a second stitch through 
the first (Fig. 5 : Step 2). Place this stitch on the left-hand needle (Fig. 5 r 
Step 3). Repeat this process until the required number of stitches has been cast on.. 



(b) Second Method. 

One knitting-needle only and the left thumb are employed. Leave an end of 
wool a yard or more in length according to the number of stitches to be cast on. 
Make a slip loop as described above, and retain it on the needle. Make a second, 
slip loop and place it on the needle beside the first one. (See Fig. 6.) Continue 
the process until the required number of stitches have been cast on. It will be 
seen from Fig. 3 that this method of casting-on consists in making a series of slip 
loops. 

This is the better method to employ when strength is required, or when coarse 
needles are employed. 



16 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




Fig. 5. Casting-on. First Method, Knitting-on. 
(Steps 1, 2, and 3.) 



KNITTING. 



17 




Fig. 6. Second Method of Casting-on — a Series of Slip Loops. 

(c) Casting-on on Three Needles. 

(1) Knitting-on. — Suppose that 20 stitches are to be cast-on on each of three 
needles. Cast on 20 stitches on one needle, form the twenty-first stitch, and leave 
it on the right-hand needle ; drop the left-hand needle, pass the right-hand needle 
to the left hand, and pick up a fresh needle with the right hand. Cast on another 
19 stitches on the second needle (making 20 in all), form the twenty-first stitch, 
and again keep it on the right-hand needle, to form the first stitch of the third 
needle. Cast on the remaining 19 stitches of the third needle. Take great care 
to draw the first stitch of each needle sufficiently tight to leave no gap between 
the needles. (Fig. 7.) 




Fig. 7. Casting-on on Three Needles. {Step 1.) 



2— (815 B) 



18 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



Pass the left hand lightly along the three needles to see that no stitches have 
become twisted. Bring the third needle round to the commencing stitch of the 
first needle and begin to knit in that stitch, drawing the first stitch up very tightly 
so that no " bar of wool " is left between the needles. (Fig. 8.) 




Fig. 8. Casting-on on Three Needles. (Step 2.) 

(2) When the second method is employed. — Take the first needle, and cast on 
the required number of stitches by making a series of slip loops. ' Take up the 
second needle, and be careful, in making the first stitch on this needle, to pass the 
wool round the thumb as closely as possible to the last stitch on the first needle • 
this will prevent the formation of a gap between the needles. Deal similarly with 
the commencement of the third needle, and join the three needles together as 
described under " Knitting-on." 

PLAIN KNITTING. 

Place the hands in position as described under " Method of Holding Work " 
{Figs. 1 and 2). Insert the point of the right-hand needle in the stitch to be 
iknitted ; pass the wool round this needle with the forefinger of the ri^ht hand 
•(see Fig. 9), and draw the wool through to form another stitch. Retain & this new 
iStitch on the right-hand needle. Proceed in this manner to the end of the row 

In knitting on two needles the first stitch of each row must always be sliDDed 
This slipping may be done in two ways (in plain knitting) : " 



KNITTING. 



19 



(1) Without chain edge, — In this method the needle is simply inserted knit-wise, 
and the stitch is slipped off on to the right-hand needle. 




Fig. 9. Plain Knitting. 




Fig. 10. Chain Edge. 



20 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



(2) With chain edge. — In this method the needle is inserted purl-wise, the wool 
is carried round the first stitch from the front to the back of the work, and the 
second stitch knitted in the ordinary manner. (See Fig. 10.) 

PURLING. 

In purling, keep the wool to the front of the work. Insert the needle from 
right to left through the front of the stitch to be purled. Pass the wool round 
the point of the right-hand needle from right to left (Step 1, Fig. 11). Draw the 
wool through the stitch in a backward direction (Step 2, Fig. 11(a) ), and allow the 
loop to be drawn off the left-hand needle. 




Fig. 11. Purl.ng. (S.ep 1. 




Fig. 11(a). Purling. (Step 2.) 



KNITTING., 



21 



CASTING-OFF. 

(a) First Method. 

Slip the first stitch, and knit the second ; then, with the left-hand needle, 
draw the first stitch over the second. Knit the third stitch.; pass the second 
stitch over this. Continue to remove the stitches in this manner (see Fig. 12). 
When only one stitch remains, break off the wool ; draw the loop of the remaining 
stitch through, and fasten off the end by knitting or darning it in. A chain edge 
is produced by this method of casting-off. 




Fig. 12. Casting-off. First Method. 

(b) Second Method. 

This is known as " Knitting-off." It produces an edge which matches the 
casting-on better than the edge produced by the First Method. 

Knit two together (Fig. 13), and transfer the resulting stitch from the right- 
hand needle to the left (Fig. 14). Again knit two together and transfer the stitch. 
Repeat this process until only one stitch remains on the needle. Deal with this 
remaining stitch as described under First Method. 

(c) Third Method — To produce a rounded method of closing up an opening. 
Break off the wool, leaving an end about 8 in. in length. Knit a stitch, and 

draw the end of the wool right through the stitch (see Fig. 15). Proceed in this 
manner until one stitch only remains. Deal with this remaining stitch as described 
under First Method. 



22 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




Fig 



Castiag-off. Second Method. {Step 2.) 



(i) Fourth Method — To produce a square closed end, at the toe of a stocking; top 
of a baby's glove, etc. 
Arrange the stitches on two needles, an equal number on each. Turn the work 
on to the wrong side. Knit two stitches together, one from each needle ; knit 
another two stitches together in the same manner (see Figs. 16 and 17). Pass the 
first resulting stitch over the second. Again knit two stitches together, one from 
each needle, and repeat the process of passing the previous stitch over. Continue 
in this way until only one stitch remains. Deal with this remaining stitch as 
described under First Method. 



KNITTING. 



23 




Fig. 15. Casting-off. Third Method : to produce a Rounded 
Method of- Closing up an Opening. 




Fig. 16. Casting-off. Fourth Method : to produce a Square-closed End. 

(Step 1.) 



24 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




Fig. 17. Casting-off. Fourth Method : to produce a Square-closed End. 

{Step 2.) 

(e) Grafting-off. 

This is another method of casting-off the toe of a stocking, etc., without leaving 
any evidence of a ridge. Though the most difficult method of casting-off, it is 
the neatest. 

Arrange the stitches on two needles, an equal number on each. Break off 
the wool, leaving an end about 14 in. long. Thread this into a wool needle — which 
has no point — and proceed as follows : — 

(1) Insert the wool- needle knit- wise into the first stitch on the front needle, 
and slip the stitch from the knitting-needle on to the wool-needle. Next insert 
the wool-needle purl- wise into the second stitch (Fig. 18), and let this stitch re- 
main on the knitting-needle. Draw the wool through, letting the second stitch 
still remain on the front knitting-needle. 

(2) Insert the needle purl-wise into the first stitch on the back needle, and slip 
off the stitch on to the wool-needle. Insert the needle knit-wise into the second 
stitch (Fig. 19), and let this stitch remain on the knitting-needle. Draw the wool 
through, still letting the second stitch remain on the back knitting-needle. 

Return to the front needle and repeat process (1), and then to the back and 
repeat process (2). Continue in this way until only one stitch remains. Deal 
with this last stitch as described under the First Method. 



COUNTING OF ROWS AND ROUNDS. 

It is frequently necessary, in order correctly to follow instructions, to be able 
to count readily the number of " Rows " or " Rounds " which have been worked. 
Figs. 20 and 21 show the methods of doing this. 



KNITTING. 



25 




Fig. 18. Grafting-off. (Step 1. 




f.v 



Fig. 19. Grafting off. (Step 2.) 



26 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

(a) Counting of Rows. 

Twelve rows of plain knitting are shown in Fig. 20, two rows of knitting 
going to form one ridge. Each white mark, therefore, indicates two rows. 




Fig. 20. Counting of Rows. 
(Twelve rows of Plain Knitting. Each white mark represents two rows.) 

(b) Counting of Rounds. 

Twelve rounds of plain knitting are shown in Fig. 21. Each white mark, 
(therefore, indicates one round. 




! Fig. 21. Counting of Rounds. 

(Twelve rounds of Plain Knitting. Each white mark represents one round.) 



KNITTING. 



27 



JOINING WOOL. 

Under no circumstances should knots be employed to join wool in knitting. 
If a knot occurs in the knitting wool which is being used, it should not be allowed 
to remain there, but the wool should be broken, and the join carried out in the 
correct manner. Proceed as follows : — 

Use up the wool till an end about 5 in. long remains. Take the end of the 
new piece to be joined on, and place it alongside the old end, so that the two ends 
point in opposite directions, the old end to the right, and the new end to the left 
(see Fig. 22). Hold the end of the new thread steady by placing it between the 




Method of Joining Wool in Knitting. 



first and second fingers of the left hand. Holding the short end of the old wool in 
the right hand, together with the new wool coming from the ball, knit four or five 
stitches with the double wool. Then, dropping the end of the old wool, continue 
to knit with the new wool alone. Both the new and the old ends will thus be left on 
the side of the work away from the knitter. When knitting the next row or round, 
be careful not to separate the threads in the double stitches, but to knit the two 
together. The presence of the double stitches naturally produces a certain thick- 
ness in the knitting, which in fine work is better avoided. This can be done by 
splitting the wool at each end for a few inches, and removing half the strands of 
each before placing them together. The two ends together then make the thickness 
of one thread. This plan, however, should not be attempted with beginners. 



28 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



PICKING UP STITCHES. 

(a) In Plain Knitting, when the stitch has been dropped two or three 
loops only. 

Pick up the dropped stitch on to the point of the left-hand needle in front of 
the bars. With the right-hand needle take' up the lowest strand and place it on 
the left-hand needle next to the stitch (Fig. 23, Step 1). Take the stitch on the 
point of the ri°:ht-hand needle, and draw it over the bar and the point of the left- 
hand needle (Fig. 23, Step 2). Withdraw the point of the right-hand needle. 
Now take up the next strand above, and place as before -on the left-hand needle. 
Repeat the process described above. Continue in this manner until the top loop 
of the ladder has been picked up. 




A. 

Fig. 23. Plain Knitting : picking up a Dropped Stitch. 
(A) Step 1. (B) Step 2. 



(b) In Purling, when the stitch has been dropped for two or three loops 

ONLY. 

Pick up the dropped stitch on to the point of the left-hand needle behind the 
loops. With the right-hand needle take up the lowest loop and place it on the 
left-hand needle in front of the stitch (Fig. 24, Step 1). Insert the point of th 



KNITTING. 



29 



right-hand needle into the stitch, and draw it forward over the loop and the point 
of the left-hand needle (Fig. 24, Step 2) . Withdraw the point of the right-hand 
needle. Proceed in exactly the same manner with each ascending loop, until the 
top rung of the ladder has been picked up. 




Purling : picking up a Dropped Stitch. 
(A) Step 1. (B) Step 2. 



(c) Picking up the Stitch with a Crochet-hook. 

This method is preferable when the stitch has been dropped down for a. 
considerable number of loops. 

(1) Plain Knitting. — Insert the point of the crochet-hook in the dropped stitch,, 
and pass it behind the lowest loop (Fig. 25, Step 1). With the hook, draw the loop- 
forwards and downwards through the stitch (Fig. 25, Step 2). Retaining the- 
stitch on the hook, pass the point behind the next loop above, and draw this through 
the stitch as before. Repeat this process until the top loop of the ladder has been, 
picked up. 

(2) Purling. — To pick up a purled stitch with a crochet-hook, turn to'the back; 
of the work, and proceed exactly as in the case of a knitted stitch. 



30 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




A. B. 

Fig. 25. Picking up a Dropped Stitch with a Crochet-hook. 
(A) Step 1. (B) Step 2. 



DECREASINGS. 

I. 

The number of stitches on the needle may be decreased in either of the following 

ways : — 

(a) First Method. 

Knitting two stitches together. The method of doing this is clearly shown in 
the illustration of Casting off, Second Method, Figs. 13 and 14. This method of 
decreasing produces a slight slope to the right. 



(6) Second Method. 

Slip a stitch, knit the next stitch, and with the point of the left needle draw 
the slipped stitch over the knitted one and the point of the right needle. The 
process is clearly shown in the illustration of Casting off, First Method (Fig. 12). 
This method of decreasing produces a slight slope to the left. It is sometimes 
called the " Pulling-over " method. 

The above two ways of decreasing are frequently used in the same piece of 
work, where it is necessary to make the decreasings slope in pairs, as, for example, 
on either side of the seam-stitch in the leg of a stocking, or on the sides of the toe 
of a sock or stocking. 



KNITTING. 



31 



INCREASINGS. 

The number of stitches on a needle may be increased in any of the following 
ways : — 

First Method. 

Knit twice into the same stitch, i.e., into the front, and then, before removing 
it, into the back of the same stitch. This is a very satisfactory method of increasing 
for most purposes, as it produces no hole in the work, and does not draw the knit- 
ting out of shape in any way. The increasing made by this method is, indeed, 
almost indistinguishable. 




A. B. 

Fig. 26. Second and Third Methods of Increasing. 



Second Method. 

When doing plain knitting, an additional stitch may be made by bringing the 
wool to the front under the point of the right needle, taking it over to the back 
again, and then knitting the next stitch as usual. Fig. 26, A, shows the new 
stitch thus made, and the wool being placed round the right-hand needle in 
readiness to knit the next stitch. 



32 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

In the case of purling, the wool is already at the front. Pass it over the needle 
to the back, and under it to the front again ; then purl the next stitch. 

This method of increasing causes a hole, and is frequently used to produce 
fancy patterns. A seiies of such holes may also be used for inserting ribbon or 
draw-strings. 

To obtain a still larger hole, pass the wool twice or even three times round the 
needle. Such a hole is sometimes employed as a button-hole, e.g., in a child's 
jersey, etc. 

Third Method — Raising a stitch. 

Make the stitch in this case by taking a loop from the row below (see Fig. 26, B), 
putting it on to the left needle, and knitting into it with the right needle. This 
method produces no hole. 




Fig. 27. Fourth Method of Increasing. 



Fourth Method. 

Take up the small bar of thread between the two loops of 1he previous row, 
and knit into it (see Fig. 27). This makes a very small hole which is used in some 
fancy patterns, e.g., in a Bedroom Slipper. 

Fifth Method — To make a stitch at the commencement of a row. 

Place the point of the right-hand needle under the wool before inserting it into 
the first stitch (see Fig. 28). This forms an additional stitch or loop at the 



KNITTING. 



33 



beginning of the row. When coming back along the row, be careful to knit into 
this loop separately. 




Fig. 28. Fifth Method of Increasing. 
(Making a stitch at the beginning of a needle.) 



3-(8l5B) 



B. — CROCHET. 

METHOD OF HOLDING WORK. 

Hold the wool in the left hand in the following way : Pass it over the first 
two fingers, under the third, and wind it once round the little finger, in order to 
keep the wool in position and control the tension. 

Hold the work with the thumb and first finger of the left hand, and stretch 
out the second finger a short distance to hold the wool clear of the work (see Figs. 
29 and 30). 




Fig. 29. Method of Holding Wool in Crochet. 
(Outside view as seen by an onlooker.) 

MAKING A SLIP LOOP. 
Instructions for doing this are given above under Knitting. 

CHAIN STITCH. 

Make a slip loop, and place it on the hook. Holding the wool at a tension. 

across the fingers of the left hand, place the hook under the wool, as shown in 

Fig. 31, and draw the portion taken up through the loop. Again place the hook 

under the wool and draw it through. Repeat this until a chain of the requisite- 

34 



CROCHET. 



35 




Fig. 30. Method of Holding Wool in Crochet. 

( Inside front view as seen by the worker — but with the left hand raised in order 

to show the method of twisting the wool round the little finger.) 




Fig. 31. Chain' Stitch. 



36 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

length has been obtained. A chain is always employed in commencing a crocheted 
article, and chain stitches are also used for turning the rows in double, treble, and 
double-treble crochet. 



DOUBLE CROCHET. 

Make a short length of chain as a foundation. Place the hook in the second 

chain, and draw a loop of wool through it. Now place the hook again under the 

wool, and draw the wool through the two loops which are upon the hook. This 

. completes the first stitch. Place the hook in the next stitch, as seen in Fig. 32, 

and proceed as before. Repeat this process to the end of the row. 




Fig. 32. Double Crochet. 



TREBLE STITCH. 



Again make a short length of chain as a foundation. Pass the hook under 
the wool, and then place it in the third chain from the end. Draw the wool through, 
thus making the number of stitches on the hook up to three. Put the hook under 
the wool {see Fig. 33), and draw a loop through the first two stitches ; then, again 
placing the hook under the wool, draw a loop through the last two. This completes 
one treble stitch. 

DOUBLE TREBLE STITCH. 

This is similar to treble stitch, but the hook is passed twice under the woo\ 
before it is placed in the fourth chain. Draw the wool through, thus making thef 



CROCHET. ■ 37 

number of stitches on the hook up to four. Put the hook under the wool (Fig. 34), 
draw a loop through the first two stitches, then draw a loop through the next two, 
and, lastly, draw a loop through the remaining two. This completes one double 
treble stitch. 




Fig. 33. Crochet — Treble Stitch. 




Fig. 34. Crochet — Double-treble Stitch. 



SINGLE STITCH, 

This is chiefly used as a joining stitch, or as a means of getting from one place 
to another without breaking the thread. It is worked by passing the hook through 
a stitch, and then drawing a loop of wool through both the stitch and the loop 
which was upon the needle already. (See Fig. 35.) 



38 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




Crochet 



JOINING WOOL IN CROCHET. 

When it becomes necessary to join on new wool, it is quite inadmissible to knot 
the two ends together. Proceed to join on the new wool as follows : Leave enough 
wool from the old ball to make two or three more stitches ; take up the wool com- 
ing from the fresh ball, and work the next stitch with it, whether it be single, 
idouble, treble, or double treble. Work the next stitch with the thread from the 
old ball, the following with the new wool, one more stitch with the old (see Fig. 36), 
and then continue the work, using the new wool only. 




Fig. 36. Method of Joining Wool in Crochet. 



TASSELS, POMPOMS, AND FRINGING. 

IX. — These are often used as decorations for knitted and crocheted articles. 
Short descriptions of the methods of making them are given below. 

(a) A Tassel may be quickly made as follows : Take a strip of thick card and let 
its width be equal to the length required for the tassel. Place along the top of the 
card a double or treble piece of wool 3 or 4 in. long. Now wind the wool 
round and round the card until about twenty or twenty-five loops have been 
formed which lie evenly side by side. Tie these tightly up together at the top 
with the piece of wool that was laid along the edge of the card. Now cut through 
all the loops of wool at the bottom edge of the card ; the cut edges will form the 
ends of the tassel. Wind a piece of wool two or three times round the tassel about a 
quarter of an inch from the top, and tie securely, cutting o ff the short ends . Level the 
ends of the tassels with scissors if they are of different lengths. A tassel of larger 
size, suitable for a thick scarf, may be made from a crocheted chain looped up at 
equal intervals until sufficient fullness has been obtained. 

(b) A Pompom may be made in a similar way to a tassel, but about twice as 
many loops of wool will be required, and the lengths employed will be shorter. 
The pompom will require to be tied once only at the top, and not a second time 
as in the case of the tassel. Trim the ends with scissors to produce a nicely-rounded 
effect. 

A pompom or ball may also be made as follows : Obtain two equal, circular 
pieces of card of the required size, each one having a hole in the centre, and 
place one over the other. The diameter of the card shown in Fig. 37 was 4 in., 




Fig. 37. Circular Method of Winding Wool for a Pompom. 

39 



40 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



and the diameter o;E the opening in the centre was 1 £ in. This produced a pompom 
with a diameter of 2\ in. The dimensions may be varied to produce a pompom 
of any size desired. 

Wind the wool round the two cards from the centre outwards until they are 
covered and the centre is almost full. Insert the scissors between the cards at the 
outer circumference, and cut the wool all round. Wind a separate piece of wool 
twice round tightly between the cardboard discs, tie securely, and slip the pompom 
off. 

Steam the ball in order to make the cut ends of the wool fluffy. 

(c) A Fringe may be made in the following manner : Cut a number of strips 

of wool twice the length required for the depth of the fringe. This may be done 

by winding wool evenly round a strip of stiff card or wood, and cutting along one 

edge of the loops thus formed. A gauge, such as is used for cutting rug wool, is 

useful for this purpose. (See " Knitted Rug," St. II.) Double one of these strips 

of wool, and hold it in the left hand with the ends downwards. Now push a 

crochet hook through one of the loops of the edge to be fringed, take the doubled 

! loop of wool from the left hand on to the crochet-hook (see Fig. 38), and draw it 

pjust through the edge, leaving the two ends of the strip of wool projecting on the 

& other side. Now take these two ends of wool upon the hook (see Fig. 39), pass 

them through the loop that was hooked through, and pull them up tightly with 

the left hand (Fig. 40). Proceed thus along the entire length of the edge to be 




Fig. 38. Fringing. (Step 1.) 



TASSELS, POMPOMS, AND FRINGING. 41 




Fig. 40. Fringing. (Step 3.) 



42 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

fringed, drawing a strip of wool through every loop so that no spaces occur. A 
double or treble fringe is often desirable in the case of thin wool, silk, or cotton. 
In such a case put two or three slips of wool together, and then double them to 
form a loop. Thus, each time, a double or treble loop will be pulled through, 
making the fringe of greater thickness. 

WINDING OF WOOL. 

X. — When winding wool from a skein, avoid stretching it by winding it tightly 
into a hard ball, as this makes it thin and poor. Wind it loosely over three or four 
fingers of the left hand, held outside the ball. Withdraw these fingers carefully 
from time to time, while winding, to change the position of the ball. This plan 
■will keep the wool soft and elastic. 

SEWING TOGETHER OF PARTS OF GARMENTS. 

XI. — Many of the garments referred to in the book are not knitted in one piece, 
and the separate portions, therefore, require sewing together. In all cases this 
sewing should be done with the same material as that of which the garment has 
been knitted, to render the join as imperceptible as possible. The joins should be 
made on the wrong side of the garment. Avoid drawing the work so tightly as 
to cause dragging at the seams. In the upper classes, the girls may be taught to 
■crochet the portions of the garments together, using single stitch for this purpose. 
All ends of wool left from the knitting or joining together of garments, should 
toe neatly finished off by darning in on the wrong side of the work. 

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. 

XII. — The sharp points of steel knitting-needles and steel crochet-hooks are a 
source oE danger if carried uncovered. 

A very simple method of shielding them is to insert each in a cork when 
the work is put away. 

Knitting-pin shields made of bone may be purchased at about 3Jd. per pair, 
ithough such expensive appliances are hardly necessary for school purposes. 



ABBREVIATIONS. 

In some cases the following abbreviations are employed in the 
instructions : — 

(a) Knitting. K., knit; p., purl; st., stitch(es) ; si., slip; m., 
make ; tog., together. 

(b) Crochet. Ch., chain ; d.c, double crochet ; tr., treble ; d. tr., 
double treble. 



WOOLCRAFT. 

l--7-So many varieties of knitting wools are now placed upon the market by 
British manufacturers that it is no easy matter to select the most suitable with 
regard to price, quality, and comparative thickness. 

2. — The names and addresses of four important British manufacturing firms 
have been given below, together with information with regard to the most useful 
varieties of wools for school purposes produced by each. The lists of wools de- 
scribed are by no means complete catalogues of the varieties manufactured by 
these makers ; some of the most expensive and highly-finished wools have been 
omitted for obvious reasons. Further information can always be obtained by 
applying to the firms direct, or to their local agents. The prices quoted below 
will be found to vary locally (except in the case of " Greenock Wools," manufac- 
tured by Fleming, Reid & Co.), and to fluctuate also with the state of the wool 
market. Many retail firms are willing to quote lower prices to schools ordering 
in considerable quantities. 

3. — With regard to the comparative thickness of wools, the following distinctions 
are generally adopted by all firms : — 

(a) 2-ply is a term describing wools in which two threads only are twisted 
together, as in Shetland wool, eider wool, etc. The 2-ply wools are thus the thin 
nest wools obtainable. They usually have a soft, fine finish, and are suitable for 
making babies' garments and dainty shawls and wraps. 

' (b) 3-ply is descriptive of wools in which three threads 'are twisted together, 
producing a greater thickness than in the case of 2-ply wools, 
i (c) 4-ply wools are composed of four threads twisted together, producing wools 
of the thickness most generally employed for school purposes. It must be remem- 
bered, however, that the threads employed to produce a 4-ply wool vary in thick- 
ness with different makes ; the " twistedness " of the wool and the softness of the 
threads employed vary also, so that all 4-ply wools are not of exactly the same 
thickness, though they approximate to the same size. Similar variations occur also 
in the thicknesses of the 2-ply, 3-ply, 5-ply, 6-ply, and 8-ply wools, according to 
make and quality. 

- (d) 5-ply describes wools in which five threads are employed, producing a thicker 
wool than 4-ply. 5-ply wools are suitable for heavier garments, such as thick 
winter socks or stockings, petticoats, etc. 

(e) 6-ply wools are composed of six threads, and are consequently heavier in 
make than 5-ply. Wools known as " Wheeling " are often equal in thickness to 
6-ply, although a smaller number of thicker threads may be employed. 

(/) 8-ply wools, composed of eight threads, are the thickest wools usually 
employed, except Rug Wool. Wools known as " Double Knitting " are often 
equal in thickness to 8-ply, though frequently four threads only, but of greater 
thickness, are employed. The " Double Knitting " wools, or " Double Fingerings," 
are used largely for knitted or crocheted coats and hats. 

N.B. — In purchasing wool, it should be remembered that a thick wool at a 
low price may be no more economical than a more expensive thinner wool, for the 
same weight of a thinner wool gives greater length. 

4. — ■Qualities of Wools. The price of a wool is by no means an index of its 
wearing quality. Sometimes the cheaper wools, which are more hairy and less 
soft in finish, wear as long as, or longer than, more expensive wools of finer, softer, 

43 



44 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



and smoother varieties. An important point in selecting the quality is its suit- 
ability to the purpose in hand. For babies' garments, underwear, and soft shawls 
or wraps, a soft finish is necessary. For hats, coats, thick hose, hard-wearing gloves, 
etc., the more hairy qualities are suitable. 

5. — Colours. Wools in plain colours are usually from 4d. to 6d. a lb. cheaper than 
wools in fancy colours. The plain colours generally include white, black, natural 
grey, and pink, while fancy colours include other shades in one colour (such as 
blue, red, green, brown, etc.), speckled wools, and mixtures. 



BRITISH MANUFACTURERS AND WOOLS. 



Maker. 



Name of Wool. 



Quality. 




Use. 



I'Messrs. Fleming, 
Reid& Co., The 
: Worsted Mills, 
Greenock, Scot- 
land 



The wools manu- 
factured by this 
firm are known as 
" Greenock Knit- 
ting Wools," and 
are sold at uni- 
form prices in the 
Scotch wool shops 
throughout the 
United Kingdom. 



Do. \ do. 



do. 



do. 



Do. do. 



Do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



Scotch Fin- 
gering 
(4-ply). 



G r e enock 
Fingering 
(3, 4, and 
5-ply). 



Greenock 
Super Fin- 
gering (2, 
3, 4, and 

5-ply). 



Eider Wool 
(2 and 3- 

piy)- 



Plain 
ours, 
per lb. 

Fancy 
ours, 
per lb. 



Col- 

2/8 

Col- 

3/- 



Plain Col- 
ours, 3/8 
per lb. 

Fancy Col- 
ours, 4/— 
per lb. 



ours. 


4/8 


per lb 




Fancy 


Col- 


ours, 


V- 


per lb 




4/8 per 


lb. 



This is a strong, sound 
knitting yarn, very 
suitable for school 
purposes, or in cases 
where economy is 
desired, as, although 
not soft in finish it 
is very durable in 
wear. It is suitable 
for socks, stockings, 
petticoats, jerseys, 
school gloves, etc. 

This is a softer wool 
than the Scotch 
Fingering, but is 
strong and durable. 
It is also suitable for 
socks (in the mot- 
tled variety) , stock- 
ings, and underwear. 

This wool has a soft, 
smooth finish, and is 
suitable for babies' 
garments, shawls, 
etc. The 4 and 5-ply 
of this make are 
suitable for hose of 
a better quality. 

This is a loosely 
twisted wool, and 
can be used in place 
of Shetland wool for 
fine shawls or wraps, 
where a lacy effect is 
desired. 



WOOLCRAFT. 



45 



Maker. 


Name of Wool. 


Quality. 


Price. 


Use. 


Messrs. Fleming, 


The wools manu- 


Scott ish 


4/- per lb. 


This is an example of 


Reid& Co., The 


factured by this 


Fleece. 




a very hairy loosely- 


Worsted Mills, 


firm are known as 






twisted wool ; it is 


Greenock, Scot- 


" Greenock Knit- 






useful for soft, loose- 


land 


ting Wools," and 
are sold at uni- 
form prices in the 
Scotch wool shops 
throughout the 
United Kingdom. 






ly knitted shawls, 
where warmth and 
lightness combined 
are required. 


Do. do. 


do. do. 


Double 


Plain Col- 


This is a thick, hard- 






Knitting 


ours, 3/8 


wearing wool, suit- 






(equal to 


per lb. 


able for knitted 






8-ply). 


Fancy Col- 
ours, 4/- 
per lb. 


coats, hats, peram- 
bulator-covers, cot- 
covers, slippers, etc. 


Messrs. John 


The wools manu- 


Rose Wheel- 


Plain Col- 


This is a thick, hard- 


Paton, Son & 


factured by this 


ing. 


ours, 2/9 


wearing wool. It 


Co., Ltd., Alloa, 


firm are usually 




per lb. 


lacks softness of fin- 


Scotland. 


known as the 




Fancy Col- 


ish, but is suitable 




" Alloa Knitting 




ours and 


for heavy wear. It 




Wools." 




Mixtures, 
3/3 per lb. 


may be used for 
thick socks, stock- 
ings, jerseys, and 
school hats and 
scarfs. 


Do. do. 


do. do. 


Common- 


Plain Col- 


These are economical 






wealth 


ours, 2/1 1 


4-ply wools, of a 






Knitting 


per lb. 


thinner make than 






and Ma- 


Fancy Col- 


the " Rose Wheel- 






iine Fin- 


ours and 


ing " described 






gering, 


Mixtures, 


above, and are spe- 






4-ply. 


3/5 per lb. 


cially recommended 
for hard wear. They 
are suitable for 
strong socks, stock- 
ings, school gloves, 
etc. 


Do. do. 


do. do. 


Federation 


Plain Col- 


This wool is suitable 






Knitting. 


ours, 3/3 
per lb. 
Fancy Col- 
ours and 
Mixtures, 
3/9 per lb. 


for purposes similar 
to the two last- 
mentioned yarns, but 
is more closely twis- 
ted, and has a less 
hairy finish. 



46 



KNITTING -WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



Maker. 




Quality. 




Use. 



Messrs. John 
Paton, Son & 
Co., Ltd., Alloa, 
Scotland 



Do. do. 



The wools manu- 
factured by this 
firm are usually 
known as the 
" Alloa Knitting 
Wcols." 



Do. do. 



Do. do. 



Do. do. 



Messrs. J. & J. 
Baldwin & 
Partners, Ltd., 
Halifax, York- 
shire, England. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



This Firm is noted 
for its " Beehive 
Knitting Wools " 
and its " White 
Heather Wools." 



Rose Fin- 
gering 
(4-ply). 



Super Fin- 
gering 
Worsted 
(2, 3, 4, and 
5-ply). 



Soft Knit- 
ting Wool. 



Rose Petti- 
coat or 
Sports 
Wool. 



Rug Wool 
(2-ply 
Cable 
Twisted). 

Beehive 
Scotch 
Fingering 
(2, 3, 4, and 

5-ply). 



Plain Col- 
ours, 3/11 
per lb. 

Fancy Col- 
ours and 
Mixtures, 
4/5 per lb, 

Plain Col- 
ours, 4/9 
per lb. 

Fancy Col- 
ours, 5/3 
per lb. 



8d. per 2-oz. 
packet. 



Plain Col- 
ours, 3/9 
per lb. 

Fancy Col- 
ours, 4/5 
per lb. 



2/8 per lb. 



Plain Col- 
ours, 5/- 
per lb. 

Fancy Col- 
ours and 
Mixtures, 
5/3 per lb. 



This is a softer quality 
than the- " Federa- 
tion Knitting," and 
is suitable for vests, 
petticoats, scarfs, 
shawls, etc. 



This wool is more 
expensive than those 
mentioned above, 
but has a smoother, 
softer finish, and is 
therefore suitable for 
fine underwear, ba- 
bies' garments, and 
articles where a dain- 
ty finish is required. 

This is a fine, closely- 
twisted wool, with a 
smooth finish, simi- 
lar to Andalusian 
wools. It is suitable 
for the same pur- 
poses as the " Super 
Fingering Worsted." 

This is a thick, soft 
wool, suitable, as its 
name implies, for 
knitted coats. Being 
warm and light, it is 
also suitable for mak- 
ing rugs for cots, 
perambulators, etc. 

This is a glossy, hard- 
wearing rug wool of 
excellent quality. 



This is a soft, highly 
finished fingering of 
excellent quality. It 
is suitable for socks, 
stockings, gloves, 
and soft underwear, 
as it does not irritate 
the skin. 



WOOLCRAFT. 



47' 



Maker. 



Name of Wool. 



Quality. 




Use. 



Messrs. J. & J. 
Baldwin & 
Partners, Ltd., 
Halifax, York- 
shire, England. 



Do. do. 



Do. do. 



This Firm is noted 
for its " Beehive 
Knitting Wools " 
and its " White 
Heather Wools." 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



Do. 



Do. 



Do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



Do. do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



Beehive 
Petticoat 
Wool. 

Beehive 
Double 
Knitting. 

Beehive 
Vest Wool 
(2, 3, and 
4-ply). 



Beehive 
Soft Knit- 
ting (4-ply) 



Beehive 
Eider, 
Ivorine 
and Ice 
Wool 
(2-ply). 

Beehive 

Shetland 

(2-ply). 
Beehive 

Andalusian 

(4-ply). 

White Hea- 
ther Scotch 
Fingering 
(2, 3, 4, and 
5-ply). 



White Hea- 
ther Vest 
Wool (2, 3, 
and 4-ply). 



3/11 per lb. 



4/6 per lb. 



Plain Col- 
ours, 8|d. 
per 2-oz. 
packet. 

Fancy Col- 
lours, 9£d. 
per 2-oz. 
packet. 



5/9 per lb. 



These are stout wools, 
specially adapted for 
warm garments, and. 
articles for sports' 
purposes. 



This is soft to the- 
touch, and washes, 
splendidly. 



This wool is well/ 
known for its high 
quality and soft fin- 
ish. It is a closely- 
twisted 4-ply wool,, 
suitable for purposes 
where a smooth, fine- 
finish is required. 



These are fine wools,, 
suitable for dainty 
shawls and wraps. 



Both 4/6 These are soft, fine- 



per lb. 



Plain Col- 
ours, 4/3 
per lb. 

Fancy Col- 
ours and 
Mixtures, 
4/6 per lb. 

3/11 per lb. 



wools suitable for 
babies' garments,. 
and dainty articles 
generally. 



This is a hard-wearing, 
wool, suitable for 
purposes similar to- 
the " Beehive Scotch 
Fingering." It is,, 
however, less soft in 
finish. 



This is a useful vest 
wool, but less highly 
finished than, the- 
Beehive vest wool. 



48 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



Maker. 



Name of Wool. 



Quality. 



Price. 



Use. 



. Messrs. J. & J. 
Baldwin & 
Partners, Ltd. , 
Halifax, York- 
shire, England. 



wMessrs. Baldwin 
>'■' & Walker, Ltd., 
West Croft 
Mills, King 
Cross, Halifax, 
England. 



Do. 



do. 



Do. 



Do. 



do. 



Do. do. 



This Firm is noted 
for its " Beehive 
Knitting Wools" 
and its " White 
Heather Wools." 



This Firm is spe- 
cially noted for 
its " Ladyship 
Wools." 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do. 



do 



do. 



Beehive 
Rug Wool 
(2-ply 
Cable 
Twisted). 

Turkey 
Rug Wool 
(6-ply 
Plain 
Twist). 



L adyship 
Scotch 
Fingering 
(2, 3, 4, and 
5-ply). 



La d y s h i p 
Fingering 
(3 and 4- 

piy)- 



Ladys hip 
Shetland 
Wool. 



L adyship 
Andalusian 
Wool. 



Ladyship 
Vest Wool 
(2, 3, and 
4-ply). 



2/4 per lb. 



2/2 per lb. 



Plain Col- 
ours, 4/6 
per lb. 

Fancy Col- 
ours, 4/1 1 
per lb. 



4/11 per lb. 



5/2 per lb. 



5/- per lb. 



5/6 per lb. 



The Beehive Rug 
Wool (i.e., the Cable- 
twisted variety) is 
thicker and more 
glossy than the Tur- 
key Rug Wool. Both 
varieties are sold in 
4-oz. packets. 



This is a high-class 
Scotch Fingering, 
which combines 

hard-wearing quali- 
ties with softness of 
finish. The finer 
qualities are suitable 
for shawls, and warm 
light articles. 

This is a stouter and 
more elastic wool 
than the Scotch Fin- 
gering, and is suit- 
able for socks, stock- 
ings, petticoats, etc., 
where hard wear is 
required. 

This is a closely twis- 
ted make of Shetland 
wool, with a fine, 
smooth finish. It is 
useful for fine shawls 
and babies' gar- 
ments. 



This is a finely finished 
Andalusian wool, 
suitable for dainty 
articles. 

This is a soft vest wool 
with an exception- 
ally fine finish. 



WOOLCRAFT. 



49 



Maker. 


Name of Wool. 


Quality. 


Price. 


Use. 


Messrs. Baldwin 


This Firm is spe- 


Primrose 


4/3 per lb. 


This is a stout, hard- 


& Walker, Ltd., 


cially noted for 


Petticoat 




wearing wool, with 


West Croft 


its " Ladyship 


Wool 




a hairy finish. It is 


Mills, King 


Wools." 


(4-ply). 




suitable for coats. 


Cross, Halifax, 








woollen hats, bon- 


England. 








nets, jerseys, etc. 


Do. do. 


do. do. 


Distaff 


Plain Col- 


This is a strong, cordy 






Knitting 


ours, 3/11 


yarn for hard usage. 






Wool 


per lb. 


It is suitable for 






(4-ply). 


Fancy Col- 
ours and 
Mixtures, 
4/6 per lb. 


hard-wearing hose, 
school gloves, and 
scarfs, etc. 



GERMAN WOOLS. 

Many imported wools in common use are manufactured in Germany, notable 
among these being the " Berlin " wools. 

Single Berlin Wool is a fleecy fourfold wool, suitable where warmth and softness 
are desired. 

Double Berlin Wool is a thicker eightfold wool, of a similar texture and finish 
to the Single Berlin. 

An average price for both the above wools is 4s. 6d. per lb. for plain colours, 
and a little more for fancy colours. 

Most of the British wools previously described arfe also duplicated in German 
makes, but as these are no cheaper in general than the corresponding English 
wools, it has not been thought necessary to describe them in detail. 



4— (815B) 



STANDARD I and UPPER INFANTS. 



i. DOLL'S MUFF KNITTED ON BONE NEEDLES. 

To Teach (1) Casting-on, (2) Plain Knitting on Bone Needles, and (3. 
Casting-off. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 6. Rather less than i oz. of 4-ply wool. 
Quantity required for a class of 50 = 5£ oz. . Cost of same at 3s. 1 Id. per lb. = 
Is. 4£d. (For cheaper varieties of 4-ply wool and other qualities, see under 
Woolcraft.) If No. 6 Knitting Cotton at 2s. per lb. be employed, the quantity 
required will be 1\ oz., and the total cost ll|d. 




Fig. 41. Doll's Muff Knitted on Bone Needles. 
50 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 



51 



Instructions. — Cast on ten stitches, or as many as will produce knitting haying 
a, width of 2 in. without stretching. (Teach the first method of casting-on described 
in the General Instructions at the commencement of the book.) Work a strip of plain 
knitting 3£ in. long. Knit every stitch of the first row, and in all succeeding 
rows slip the first stitch and knit the remaining stitches. Cast off loosely. (Teach 
the first method of casting-off , described in the ' General Instructions.) 

Making up. — Double the strip, so that the cast-off edge lies over the cast-on 
edge. Oversew these edges neatly together, using a darning needle, and the same 
kind of wool as that of which the muff was knitted. Suspend the muff by narrow 
ribbon of the required length. This may be tied in a bow, as shown in Fig. 41, to 
obviate the difficulty of joining the ends of the ribbon neatly. 

N.B.— The above muff, and all the doll's garments described in the book, 
have been made to fit a doll 16 in. high. (See General Instructions.) 




Fig. 42. Doll's Scarf Knitted on Bone Needles. 



52 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



2(A). DOLL'S SCARF KNITTED ON BONE NEEDLES. 

Practice in Casting-on, Plain Knitting on Bone Needles, and Casting-off. 

Materials.— Two Bone Needles— size 8. About A oz. of 4-ply wool or other 
wool of a suitable thickness. Quantity required for a class of 50 = 9 J oz. Cost of 
same at 3s. lid. per lb. = 2s. 4£d. (For cheaper varieties of 4-ply wool and other 
qualities, see under Woolcraft.) If No. 6 Knitting Cotton at 2s. a lb. be 
employed, the quantity required will be 12 oz., and the total cost Is. 6d. 

Instructions.— Cast on eight stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 1£ in. 
wide without stretching. Work a strip of plain knitting 12 in. long. Knit every 
stitch of the first row, and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the 
remaining stitches. Cast off loosely. 

Making up. — Gather up the ends of the scarf, and attach a tassel to each. 
(For method of making tassels, see General Instructions.) 

2(b). INSTRUCTIONS FOR FULL-SIZED SCARF ON BONE 
NEEDLES, TO FIT THE CHILD. 

3 oz. of 4-ply wool required. Cost at 3s. lid. per lb. = 9d. 
Cast on 42 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 7 in. wide without 
stretching. Knit a length of 1J yds. in the same manner as. described under Doll's 
Scarf. Make the tassels fuller, and from longer strips of wool, so that they will 
be in proportion to the size of the scarf. 

3. DOLL'S SHAWL KNITTED ON BONE NEEDLES. 
• Further practice in Casting-on, Plain Knitting, and Casting-off. Larger 
f number of stitches employed. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 7. J oz. of 4-ply wool, or other wool of 
a suitable thickness. Quantity required for a class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same 




Fig. 43. Doll's Shawl Knitted on Bone Needles. 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 



53 



at 3s. 1 Id. per lb. = 3s. Id. (For cheaper varieties of 4-ply wool and other qualities, 
see under Woolcraft.) If No. 6 Knitting Cotton be employed, the quantity 
required will be 16 oz., and the cost 2s. 

Instructions. — Cast on 24 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 5 in. without 
stretching. Work a strip of plain knitting 7 J in. long. Knit every stitch in the first 
row, and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the remaining stitches. 
Cast off loosely. Make a single fringe {see Fig. 43) all round the edge of the shawl, as 
described under General Instructions. 

N.B. — Instructions for knitting a full-sized shawl in a more difficult pattern 
are given under Standard V Syllabus. 



4. DOLL'S SCARF ON STEEL NEEDLES. 

Use of Steel Needles introduced, and Chain Edge taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. J oz. of 4-ply wool, or other wool of 
a suitable thickness. Quantity required for a class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same 
at 3s. lid. per lb. = 3s. Id. (For cheaper varieties of 4-ply wool and other quali- 
ties, see under Woolcraft.) If No. 6 Knitting Cotton be employed the quantity 
required will be 1 lb., and the cost about 2s. 




Fig. 44. Doll's Scarf on Steel Needles 



54 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — Cast on 10 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 1 or 1J in. 
Work a strip of plain knitting 12 or 13 in. long. Knit every stitch of the first row, 
and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch so as to produce chain edge (see Fig. 44 
and General Instructions), and knit the remaining stitches. Cast off. Make a 
fringe at each end of the scarf, as described under General Instructions at the 
beginning of the book. 

5. ROLLED PINCUSHION. 

Second Exercise in Plain Knitting on Steel Needles, with Chain Edge. 

Materials. — Two Steel or Bone Needles — size 10. J oz. 4-ply wool. Quantity 
required for class of 50 = \2\ oz. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 3s. 6Jd. (For 
cheaper wools, see under Woolcraft.) If No. 6 Knitting Cotton be employed, 
the quantity required will be 19 oz., and the cost of the same at 2s. per lb. = 2s. 4£d. 




Fig. 45. Rolled Pincushion. 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 55 

Instructions. — Cast on 16 stitches, or as many as will produce a width of 2| in. 
without stretching. (Employ second method of casting-on given in General 
Instructions.) Work 8 or 9 in. of plain knitting with chain edge. Cast off. 

Making up. — Make a crocheted chain, from 16 to 20 in. in length, for suspending 
the pincushion, and sew the two ends of the chain together to form a circle. Now 
roll the strip of knitting round the part of the chain where the join occurs, so as 
to produce the cylindrical shape shown in Fig. 45. Sew the loose end of the strip 
neatly down on to the knitting beneath it. 

6. QUILT FOR DOLL'S BED. 

Third Exercise in Plain Knitting on Steel Needles, with Chain Edge. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 13. 1£ Balls of *' O-So-Silkie," Medium 
Size (2d. per ball), 1J Balls of " Coton Perle D.M.C.," No. 5 (2d. per ball), or \ oz. 
of Knitting Cotton, No. 6. Quantity of Knitting Cotton for class of 50 = 
1 lb. 9 oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = 3s. 1 id. 




Fig. 46. Quilt for Doll's Bed. 

Instructions. — The Quilt is made from three strips, each of which is knitted as 
follows : Cast on 14 stitches, or as many as will give a width of about If in. without 
stretching. Work a strip of plain knitting 7 in. in length. Knit every stitch of the 
first row, and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch in the manner described to 
produce chain edge and knit the remaining stitches. Cast off. 

Making up. — Sew the three strips neatly together, as in Fig. 46, thus affording 
practice in Oversewing. Put a double fringe all round the quilt, as described 
under General Instructions. 



56 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



7. PURSE WITH NECK-CORD FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR. 

Fourth Exercise in Plain Knitting on Steel Needles. Plaiting introduced 
for the Cord. 

Materials.— Two Steel Needles— size 14. A oz. No. 6 Knitting Cotton of any 
colour. Wool may be employed if preferred. Quantity of Knitting Cotton 
required for class of 50 = 1 lb. Cost of same = 2s. 

Instructions. — Cast on 20 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 2\ in. 
without stretching. Work a strip of plain knitting 8 in. long. Knit every stitch 
of the first row, and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the remaining 
stitches. Cast off loosely. 




Fig. 47. Purse with Neck-cord for Child's own Wear. 



Making up. — Fold up the bottom edge of the strip to form a bag, leaving a flap 
2 \ in. deep uncovered at the top. Oversew neatly up the side-seams, and turn 
the bag inside out. Turn in the top corners of the flap to meet each other, thus 
producing the pointed shape shown in Fig. 47. Turn down the flap to ascertain 
the position for the button, and sew this into its place. Make a small loop of plaited 
knitting cotton, and sew it on to the under-edge of the point of the flap for fastening 
purposes. An alternative and easier method for fastening the purse is by means 
of a press-stud (20 a Id.). 

Make a plait of knitting cotton about 34 in. long, and attach the ends of this 
strongly to the under-edge of the flap, for suspending the purse round the neck. 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 



57 



Both the loop for fastening the purse, and the cord for suspension round the neck, 
may be made from a crocheted chain if preferred. 

N.B. — This and the following exercise afford practice in the same type of 
knitting. Children may be allowed, therefore, to exercise their choice as to which 
purse they would like to make. 



8. PURSE WITH HANDLES FOR CHILD'S OWN USE. 

Fifth Exercise in Plain Knitting on Steel Needles. Method of making 
a Crocheted Chain taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. J oz. No. 6 Knitting Cotton of any 
colour. Wool may be employed if preferred. Quantity of Knitting Cotton 
required for class of 50 = 13 oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = Is. 7Jd. 




Fig. 48. Purse with Handles for Child's own Use. 



Instructions. — Cast on 20 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 1\ in. 
without stretching. Work a strip of plain knitting 7 in. long. Knit every stitch 
of the first row, and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the remaining 
stitches. Cast off loosely. 

Making up. — Take the bottom edge of the strip and fold it upwards until it 
lies exactly over the top edge, thus forming a bag. Oversew the two sides together 
neatly, leaving 1 in. at the top of each side unsewn (see Fig. 48) . Turn the purse on 
to the right side. Make a crocheted chain of knitting cotton 14 in. long. Thread a 
large darning needle, bodkin, or raffia needle with this chain, and run it round the 
purse at the bottom of the loose flaps left at the top. Sew the loose ends of the 
cord neatly together, and draw up the top of the purse, so that a loop of the 
cord is left at each side to form a handle. 



58 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

9. KNITTED IRON-HOLDER. 

Sixth Exercise in Plain Knitting. 

Materials.— Two Steel Needles— sizel4. f oz. of No. 6 Knitting Cotton of any 
colour. Cloth or flannel for padding, and sateen for lining. Quantity of Knitting 
Cotton required for class of 50 = 1 lb. 3 oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = 2s. 4£d. 




Fig. 49. Knitted Iron-holder. 



Instructions. — The cover for the Iron-holder is made of three strips, each of which 
is knitted as follows : Cast on 14 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 1J in. 
unstretched. Work a strip of knitting 5J in. long. Knit every stitch of the first 
row, and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the remaining stitches. 
Cast off. 

This exercise can be done as " Community " work, three children knitting a 
strip each to form one iron-holder. 

Making up. — Sew the three strips together to form a square (Fig. 49) . Place 
on this square, layers of cloth, flannel, etc., to form padding for the Holder, and on 
top of these place a lining of sateen, print, or calico. Turn in the raw edges of 
the lining, and oversew the folded edges of the lining to the sides of the knitted 
square. 

N.B. — A dish-cloth for Mother, a blackboard pad for Teacher, or a 
polishing pad for furniture or metal, are articles of a similar nature which may be 
made at this stage. 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 59 

io. PINCUSHION COVER. 

Seventh Exercise in Plain Knitting. Sewing on of Cord for Decorative 
Purposes introduced. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 12. J oz. of No. 6 Knitting Cotton, or 
\ ball of " O-So-Silkie," Medium Size (2d. a ball). The cover shown in the illus- 
tration is knitted from " O-So-Silkie." Quantity of Knitting Cotton required for 
class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = Is. 7d. 




Fig. 50. Pincushion Cover. 



Instructions. — The Pincushion Cover consists of two squares, each of which is 
knitted as follows : Cast on 20 stitches, or as many as will produce a width of 3£ in. 
without stretching. Work a square of plain knitting ; knit every stitch of the first 
row, and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the remaining stitches. 
Cast off. 

Making up. — Place the second square over the first. Oversew the edges of the 
two squares together round three sides, and then turn the cover on to the right 
side. Insert the square pincushion, which may consist of a white' calico cover, 
stuffed with any cuttings or frayings from the children's work. Oversew the 
edges of the fourth side together after the insertion of the cushion. 

Now decorate the pincushion by sewing round the edges a plaited chain. Form 
the chain into a loop at each corner, as shown in Fig. 50. The chain should be 
about 23 in. long, and made from six threads of " O-So-Silkie," two threads going 
together to form one strand of the plait. 



•60 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

ii. WASHING GLOVE. 

Larger Number of Stitches Employed. 

Materials.— Two Bone Needles— size 9. J oz. Milford's White Knitting Cotton, 
No. 6 (three threads). A 2-oz. ball of this cotton may be obtained for 3d., and 
three balls, or 6 oz., will knit eight gloves at a cost of 9d. 




Fig. 51. Washing Glove. 

Instructions. — Cast on 30 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 5J in. 
wide without stretching. (Employ second method of casting-on described under 
General Instructions.) Work 15 in. of plain knitting with chain edge. Cast off. 

Making up. — Fold the strip into halves, as shown in Fig. 51, and oversew 
neatly up the two side-seams. Turn the glove on to the right side. 



12. DOLL'S MUFF WITH KNITTED NECK SUPPORT. 

to teach the method of knitting with a section of the stitches, while 
the Others are Temporarily Passed on to Wool to be Picked up 
and Knitted Later. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. J oz. of 4-ply wool. Quantity required 
for class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same at 3s. lid. per lb. = 3s. Id. (For cheaper 
wool, see under Woolcraft.) 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 61 

If No. 6 Knitting Cotton be employed, the amount required for a class of 
50 will be 17 oz., and the total cost of the same, 2s. 1 Jd. 

Instructions. — Cast on 14 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting having a 
width of 2£ in. without stretching. Work 3£ in. of plain knitting with chain edge. 
Now knit seven stitches (i.e., half-way along the needle), and slip the remaining 




Fig. 52. Doll's Muff with Knitted Neck Support. 

stitches on to a darning needle threaded with wool. Draw the needle through gently, 
leaving the stitches supported by the wool. Unthread the needle, and tie the two- 
ends of the wool securely together. The stitches will thus be out of the way until 
they are required, and there will be no fear of their dropping. Continue to work 
plain knitting on the remaining seven stitches, until a narrow strip 7 in. long has been 
knitted with chain edge as before. Cast off. The diagram in Fig. 53 shows the 
shape of the knitting laid flat before the muff is made up. Now slip the stitches- 



62 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



which were supported on the wool on to a knitting-needle and draw out the wool. 
Knit on these seven stitches a strip 6 in. long, also with chain edge. Cast on. 



6° 



\!< 



D 


\ 


c. 




^ 


B 


7 
i 


G H 

t F 





<— -at" -> 

Fig. 53. Doll's Muff with Knitted Neck Support. 



Making up. — Fold EF to GH and sew firmly down. Sew AB (the top edge of 
the shorter strip) to CD (a section of the inside edge of the longer strip). Turn 
the muff on to the other side, and it will be found that the shape shown in Fig. 52 
has been produced. 



13. DOLL'S WOOLLEN SHOE. 

Casting off a Section of the Stitches taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. -J- oz. of 4-ply wool, or other wool of 
suitable thickness. Quantity required for a class of 50 = 6J oz. Cost of same 
at 3s. lid. per lb. = Is. 6 £d. (For cheaper varieties of 4-ply wool and other qualities, 
see under Woolcraft.) 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 



63 



Instructions. — Cast on 20 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 2\ in. 
without' stretching. There will be about 38 or 40 rows. (For method of counting 
rows, see General Instructions^ Knit every stitch of the first row, and in all 
succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the remaining stitches. 




Fig. 54. Doll's Woollen Shoe. 

Now cast off 12 stitches, that is, along the line AB, shown in Fig. 55, which 
illustrates the shape of the shoe opened out before it is made up. This will leave 
eight stitches on the needle for knitting the toe of the shoe. Knit three-quarters of 
an inch on these eight stitches. This will be about 12 rows. Cast off, producing 
the edge CD. 




<■- IX"- -~> 

Fig. 55. Doll's Woollen Shoe. 



Ankle-band. — Cast on 24 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 3 in., for 
knitting the ankle-band. Knit about 6 rows of plain knitting, and then cast off. 

Making up. — Sew the short edge CD to the portion of the cast-on edge which 
comes opposite to it, i.e., to EF. Now flatten the work, so that the narrow portion 



64 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

of the knitting forms the centre of the toe-piece. Sew together the two edges at the 
toe, drawing the seam up slightly at the same time, in order to round the corners. 
Sew up the seam at the heel, making a pleat at the bottom of the seam, in order 
to shape the shoe to fit the heel. (See Fig. 54.) Sew the centre of the ankle-strap 
to the centre of the back of the shoe. The ankle-strap may be fastened by means 
of : (1) A loop and button, (2) a press-stud, or (3) tying with a crocheted chain. 
Decorate the toe of the shoe with a bow of ribbon or a woollen pompom. 

N.B. — The sewing together of this shoe is too difficult for Standard I children, 
and should be done for them by the older girls. 

14. BABY'S KNITTED SHOE. 

Eighth Exercise in Plain Knitting. More Advanced Example of Casting- 
off a Section of the Stitches. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — -size 14. 1§ balls of " O-So-Silkie," Medium size, 
will make one pair. Cost at 2d. per ball = 3 £d. If economy is important, a pah- 
can be made from 1 oz. of No. 6 Knitting Cotton at a cost of l£d. 




Fig. 56. Baby's Knitted Shoe. 

Instructions. — Cast on 38 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 4 J in. 
without stretching. (Employ second method described under General Instructions, 
as this produces a firm edge.) Work 4J in. of plain knitting. Knit every stitch 
of the first row, and in all the succeeding rows slip the first stitch and knit the 
remaining stitches. Cast off 20 stitches, leaving 18 on the needle for knitting the 
top or toe of the shoe. Knit 1 J in. on these 18 stitches and then cast off. 

Cast on 46 stitches for the ankle-strap, or as many as will give a width of 
6 in. Knit eight rows of plain knitting, and cast off. 

Making up. — The method of making up and fastening the shoe is exactly the 
same as that employed in the Doll's Woollen Shoe, given in the preceding exercise. 
Decorate the toe with a bow of ribbon or a silk pompom. 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 



65 



15. KNITTED TOY REINS. 

Plain Knitting employed for Article of more Difficult Construction. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 8. 1 oz. of 4-ply wool or other wool of 
suitable thickness. If wool at 2s. 8d. per lb. be employed, the cost of one set of 
reins will be 2d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) If 
No. 6 Knitting Cotton at 2s. a lb. be employed, the quantity required will be 1£ 
oz., and the cost a little less than 2d. 




Fig. 57. Knitted Toy Reins. 



Instructions. — Strip for Waist. — Cast on 12 stitches, or as many as will give 
a width of 2\ in. without stretching. Work a strip of plain knitting about 22 in. 
in length. Knit every stitch of the first row, and in all the succeeding rows slip the 
first stitch and knit the remaining stitches. Cast off. (To determine the exact 

5— (815E) 



66 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

length required, measure the strip round the waist of the child for whose wear the 
reins are intended.) 

Strip for Reins. — Cast on eight stitches, or as many as will give a width of 
1J in. Knit a second strip of plain knitting about 36 in. long. Cast off. 

Making up. — Sew little bells on to the front of the strip for the waist, as shown 
in Fig. 57. Let the strip of knitting be fastened round the waist by means of a 
press-stud strongly sewn on. 

Attach the ends of the longer strip to the waistband, at points 5 in. 
from each end of the latter. Sew these ends on to the waistband very strongly. 

N.B. — As this is a large piece of knitting for a Standard I child to undertake 
alone, the teacher may, if she wishes, let several children co-operate in the work, 
each one knitting a strip of about 6 or 8 in. in length. The strips may then be 
joined together neatly to form the completed reins. 



16. KNITTED TOY REINS (ALTERNATIVE SHAPE). 
Further Practice in Casting off a Section of the Stitches. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 8. 1J oz. of 4-ply wool. Cost of same 
at 3s. lid. per lb. = 4d. (For cheaper wools, see under Woolcraft.) If No. 6 
Knitting Cotton at 2s. a lb. be employed, the amount required will be 1J oz., and 
the cost 2Jd. 

Instructions. — These reins consist of a broad piece of knitting which fits across 
the chest, two narrower strips to fit round the. arms, and a long strip for the reins. 

Strip for Chest. — Cast on 14 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 
having a width of 2\ in. without stretching. Employ the second method of casting 
on (see General Instructions). Work 10J in. of plain knitting with chain edge. 
The exact length required must be determined by measuring the child for whose 
-wear the reins are intended. 

Strip for First Armhole. — Cast off 7 stitches, thus producing the edge AB 
shown in Fig. 59. Continue to work plain knitting with chain edge on the remaining 
7 stitches, i.e., along BC, until a length of about 11 in. has been knitted. Cast off. 

Strip for Second Armhole. — Pick up 7 loops at the end of the chest strap 
where the stitches were first cast on, i.e., along DE in Fig. 59. Commence to knit 
on these 7 stitches, knitting along the first row with double wool, except for the 
first stitch, which will be knitted with single wool. Do plain knitting with chain 
edge, until 11 in. has been knitted. Cast off. 

Long Strip for Reins. — Cast on 10 stitches, or as many as will give a width 
of about If- in. Again employ second method of casting on. Work a strip of plain 
knitting with chain edge about 40 in. long. 

Making up. — Sew FG, the cast-off end of the first armhole strip, to AB, which 
is the edge of the chest strap where the seven stitches were cast off. This completes 
one armhole. 

Similarly sew JH, the cast-off end of the second armhole strip, to KE to form 
the other armhole. Sew each end of the long strip for the reins to the centre of 
the outside edge of an armhole strip, as shown in Fig. 58. Do this sewing very 
strongly, as it will have to withstand great strain. 



STANDARD I AND UPPER INFANTS. 67 

Note.—(\) For carrying this out as " Community " work, see under previous 
exercise. 

(2) Either Exercise 15 or 16 can be shortened and used as a support for a baby 
in its first walking lessons. 




Fig. 58. Knitted Toy Reins. (Alternative Shape.) 



_a 



1i 



~J 



.,,. >c4 iq^.. __ 7Dt ..„_ n« 

Fig. 59. Knitted Toy Reins. (Alternative Shape!, 



STANDARD II. 



I. KNITTED BOOK MARKER WITH FRINGED ENDS. 

Purling taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. \ ball of " O-So-Silkie," Medium 
size, at 2d. per ball, or \ oz. of No. 6 Knitting Cotton. Quantity of Knitting 
Cotton required for class of 50 = 12 \ oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = Is. 7d. 

Instructions. — Cast on 12 stitches, or as many as will give a width, of 1J in. 
without stretching. Knit two rows and purl two rows alternately, until a strip 9 or 
10 in. long has been knitted. (Full instructions for purling are given under General 
Instructions. Demonstrate to class with large, wooden needles and rug wool.) 
After the first row, slip the first stitch at the commencement of each row. Cast off. 

Put a fringe at each end of the marker, as described under General Instructions. 




Fig. 60. Knitted Book Marker with Fringed Ends. 

2. COVER FOR NEEDLE-BOOK. 

Second Exercise in Purling. 

Materials.— Two Steel Needles— size 12. \ Ball of " O-So-Silkie," Medium size, 
at 2d. per ball, or J oz. of No. 6 Knitting Cotton. Quantity of knitting Cotton 
for class of 50 = 12£ oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = Is. 7d. 

Instructions. — Cast on 16 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 3 in without 
stretching. Purl a strip of knitting 12 in. long. Purl every stitch of the first row,. 

68 



STANDARD II. 



69 



and in all succeeding rows slip the first stitch purl-wise and purl the remaining 
stitches. Cast off. 

Making up. — The stiff case of thick card in which the flannel for the needles 
is fixed, may be made by Standard IV boys. Each cover consists of a piece of 
card measuring 3 in. by 2\ in. Join these two covers together down the back 
by strips of paper or linen, one on the outside of the case, and one on the inside. 
Let the flannel on which the needles will be placed measure 2J in. by 4J in., and 
neatly overcast it all the way round. Join the knitting together as follows to 
form the cover : Fold each end of the strip inwards towards the middle, till the 
two ends almost meet in the centre of the work. Sew the top and bottom edges 




Fig. 61. Cover for Needle-book. 



of each turned-down flap to the top and bottom edges of the under-part of the 
knitting. Right and left-hand pockets will thus be formed, into which the cardboard 
covers of the needle-book can be slipped in turn. 

When the knitted cover has been slipped on, the flannel may be secured in the 
cover by sewing it in with narrow ribbon. A large darning needle will take the 
ribbon quite easily, and can be passed through the back of the cardboard and 
knitted covers. Finish off the needle-book by tying the ribbon in a bow at the 
back. 



70 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

3(A). ANTIMACASSAR FOR DOLL'S HOUSE. 

Knitting One Row and Purling One Row introduced. 

Materials.— Two Steel Needles — size 12. £ BaU of " O-So-Silkie," Medium 
size, at 2d. per ball, or £ oz. of No. 6 Knitting Cotton. Quantity of Knitting Cotton 
for class of 50 = 8J oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = Is. OJd. 




Fig. 62. Antimacassar for Doll's House. 

Instructions. — Cast on 16 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 2J in. 
unstretched. Knit one row and purl one row alternately, until a strip 4 in. long has 
been knitted. After the first row, always slip the first stitch at the commencement 
of each row. Cast off. 

Make a double fringe at each end, as described under General Instructions at 
the beginning of the book. 

3(B). INSTRUCTIONS FOR FULL-SIZED ANTIMACASSAR FOR 

HOUSEHOLD USE. 
Materials.— About 12 balls of " O-So-Silkie," at 2 balls for 3£d. required. 
Cost = Is. 9d. 



STANDARD II. 



71 



Instructions. — A full-sized Antimacassar can be made by knitting about 6 strips 
like the one described above for a Doll's House, each one being, however, about 
26 in. in length. Neatly join these strips down their length, and fringe the ends of 
the finished Antimacassar. 




Fig. 63. Doll's Sofa Rug. 



4. DOLL'S SOFA RUG. 

Method of Joining Wool taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 12. \ oz. of Single Berlin Wool or 4-ply 
wool of two shades. Total quantity for a class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same at 
3s. lid. per lb. = 3s. Id. (For cheaper varieties of 4-ply wool, and other qualities, 
see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — Cast on, with the lighter shade of wool, 20 stitches, or as many 



72 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



as will give a width of 3 in. without stretching. Knit 11 rows of plain knitting, 
slipping the first stitch in such a manner as to produce chain edge. (See General 
Instructions.) 

Knit along the 12th row, until five stitches from the end are reached. Break off 
the wool, leaving an end about 5 in. long. Join on with the darker shade in the 
manner described under General Instructions, working four stitches with the double 
wool, and the last stitch with single wool of the new colour. (The teacher must 
demonstrate to the class the method of joining with large wooden needles and 
rug wool of two contrasting colours.) 

Knit 11 rows of plain knitting with the second colour. 

Knit along the 12th row, until 5 stitches from the end are reached, and then 
join on with the first shade of wool again, in the manner described above. Continue 
to knit strips of alternate colours in this manner, until about 6 in. of knitting 
has been done. Cast off. 

Fringe the ends of the rug, as sho«n in Fig. 63. (See General Instructions.) 

5. DOLL'S DUTCH BONNET. 

More Difficult Exercise in Knitting and Purling Alternate Rows. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 12. \ oz. of 4-ply wool, or other wool of 
suitable thickness. Quantity required for class of 50 = 12 \ oz. Cost of same 
at 3s. 8d. per lb. = 2s. 10£d. (For other varieties of 4-ply wool, see under 
Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 64. Doll's Dutch Bonnet. 



STANDARD II. 



73 



Instructions. — Cast on 40 stitches, or as many as will produce a width of 6£ in. 
without stretching. Knit two rows of plain knitting. Now knit one row and purl 
one row alternately for eight rows. Knit three more plain rows to make a natural 
fold where the flap turns back. 

Purl one row and knit one row alternately until 3J in. has been knitted to form 
the part to fit the head. Cast off. 

Making up. — Sew up the back seam of the bonnet on the wrong side, drawing 
it up slightly, in order to shape it to the back of the head. Turn the bonnet on to 
the right side, and fold back the flap. The plain sides of both the flap and the 
bonnet itself, should now appear uppermost. Make two lengths of crocheted 
woollen chain, each 16 in. long. Use these for making looped rosettes and strings 
for tying. Attach them to the sides of the bonnet as shown in Fig. 64. 

N.B. — Instructions for knitting a Child's Dutch Bonnet in a more decorative 
pattern are given under the Standard IV Syllabus. 

6. COSY FOR DOLL'S TEAPOT. 

Knit Two Purl Two taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 13 or 14. \ oz. of Double Berlin Wool, 
or Double Fingering. Quantity required for class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same 
at 3s. 8d. per lb. = 2s. 10£d. (For other qualities of Double Knitting Wool, see 
under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 65. Cosy for Doll's Teapot. 



74 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — The Cosy is made up of two separate halves, each of which is 
knitted as follows : Cast on 20 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 24. in. 
unstretched. The number of stitches selected must be divisible by 4. Teach 
children how to change from knitting to purling, and vice versa. Let them now 
proceed to work ribbed knitting of Knit Two Purl Two until they have completed 
a strip 2 \ in. in length. They will slip the first stitch of each row after the first, 
exactly as in the case of the strips made entirely of plain knitting or of purling. 
Cast off. 

Making up. — Place the two halves of the Cosy together, and sew up the side- 
seams for J in. from the bottom, and \ in. from the top. This will leave 1J in. in 
the middle of each side unsewn, and through these spaces the handle and spout 
of the teapot can be passed. Draw up the Cosy \ in. from the top. Decorate the 
front of this gathering with a bow of ribbon, a bow of plaited wool, or small pompoms. 

Encourage every child who possesses a doll's tea-service of her own to bring 
her own teapot, and to estimate the number of stitches required to fit her own 
pot. 

Instructions for knitting a full-sized Tea Cosy for household use are given 
under the Standard III Syllabus, and a crocheted Tea Cosy is described under 
the work for Standard VII. 

7. DOLL'S VEST- 

More Difficult Exercise in Knit Two Purl Two. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 13. •§■ oz. of 4-ply Pink Vest Wool 
Quantity required for class of 50 = about 2 lb. Cost of same at 3s. lid. per lb. = 
7s. lOd. (For other qualities of 4-ply Vest Wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The vest is made in two halves, each of which is knitted in the 
following manner : Cast on 36 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 2$ in. of 
ribbed knitting unstretched. The number of stitches selected must be divisible by 
4. Work ribbed knitting of Knit Two Purl Two, until a strip of 5 in. has been 
done. After the first row, always slip the first stitch of each row. Now cast off all 
the stitches except 8 at the end of the row. Continue to knit on these 8 
stitches, substituting plain knitting for the ribbed pattern. This strip of plain 
knitting forms the shoulder strap for one side of the vest. When 2\ in. of this plain 
knitting has been worked, cast off. 

Making up. — Place one half of the vest upon the other half, so that one shoulder 
strap is at the right-hand side of the work, and the other at the left. Now sew 
up the side seams, starting from the bottom. Leave £ in. of ribbed knitting 
unsewn at the top of each side-seam, to form part of the armhole. Sew the shoulder 
straps into position, carrying the strap attached to the front half of the work to 
the back, and the strap from the back to the front. 

A simple chain crochet border may be put round the neck and arms by a girl 
in a higher standard. The edging shown in the illustration is done as follows : — 
One double crochet in first stitch, * chain four, miss one stitch, and double crochet into 
the next stitch. Repeat from * right round the neck and arms of vest. Draw 
up the neck by running through this chain border a crocheted or plaited chain of 
wool. Even smaller pompoms than those shown in Fig. 66 may be attached to 
the ends of the chain, or these may be simply finished with knots. 

Instructions for knitting a child's vest in a more difficult pattern are given 
under the Standard IV Syllabus. 



STANDARD II. 



75- 




Fig. 66. Doll's Vest. 



8. DOLL'S KNITTED HAT. 

Knit One Purl One taught for Border of Hat. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 13 or 14. f oz. of any 4-ply wool'.. 
Quantity for class of 50 = 19 oz. Cost of same at 3s. lid. per lb. = 4s. 8d (Foir 
cheaper qualities and other varieties of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 67. Doll's Knitted Hat. 



76 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions.— Cast on 32 stitches, or an even number which will give a width 
of 4 in. without stretching. Show children how to do ribbing of Knit One Purl One. 
They will quickly see that the method employed is the same as for Knit Two Purl 
Two, but that the position of the wool is changed for every stitch instead of for every 
two stitches. Let them now proceed to work ribbed knitting of Knit One Purl One 
for eight rows, or about $ in. After the first row, always slip the commencing stitch 
of each row. This ribbed portion completes the turned up border for the front edge 
of the hat. 

Change now to plain knitting, still slipping the first stitch of each row. Continue 
until 5 in. of plain knitting has been done. 

Now commence ribbed knitting again, and do eight rows of Knit On i Purl One 
(i.e., about \ in.) to form the turned up border for the back edge of the hat. 
Cast off. 

N.B. — A pretty pattern may be produced by casting on an odd number of 
stitches and employing k. 1 p. 1 throughout. 

Making up. — Fold the strip of knitting so that it forms a double square. Over- 
sew up the two sides, thus producing a square bag. Turn this bag on to the right 
side, and fold up the strips of Knit One Purl One to form the rim or border of the hat. 
Now take each top corner of the hat in turn and draw it down to the side on to 
the rim which has been turned up. Sew each point down firmly, and over each 
sew a little full woollen pompom to form a pretty finish. 

Instructions for knitting a full-sized child's hat in two different patterns are 
given under the syllabuses for Standards III and IV respectively. 



9. DOLL'S JERSEY. 

More Difficult Exercise involving Knit One Purl Oxe. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. \} t oz. of 4-ply wool. If wool at 
2s. 8d. per lb. be employed, the cost of one Jersey will be 2Jd. (For other qualities 
of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — Only the best knitters should be allowed to attempt a jersey the 
size of the one described below, as it involves a large amount of work for a Standard 
II child. A jersey of about half the size, to fit a smaller doll, can be planned without 
difficulty from the following instructions. 

Front of Jersey. — Cast on 36 stitches, or an even number which will give a 
width of 3J in. of ribbed knitting, unstretched. The same number of stitches will 
be found to produce a width of 4£ in. when the plain knitted part is reached. Work 
1 in. of ribbed knitting of Knit One Purl One to form the border of the jersey. 
After the first row always slip the commencing stitch of each row. Change to plain 
knitting, and work 6 in. of this. 

Cast off 9 stitches at the commencement of the row, and continue plain knit- 
ting to the end of the needle. At the commencement of the next row, again cast 
off 9 stitches, thus leaving in the centre of the knitting 18 stitches not cast off. 
On these 18 stitches work ribbed knitting of Knit One Purl O.ie, for the neck-band 
of the jersey. Do about \ in. of this ribbing, and then cast off. 

Back of Jersey. — Knit this in the same way as the front. 



STANDARD II. 77 

Sleeves. — Knit each sleeve as follows : Cast on 24 stitches. Do \ in. of Knit 
One Purl One ribbing, to form the turned up cuff at the wrist. Change to plain, 
knitting, and work 3£ in. more. Cast off loosely. 

Making up. — Sew the front and back of the jersey together, commencing at 
the bottom of each side-seam ; leave 1£ in. at the top of each side open for the 
insertion of the sleeves. Sew up one shoulder seam and the seam at one side q£ 




Fig. 68. Doll's Jersey. 

the neck-band. The shoulder and neck seam at the opposite side will be left 
open, so that the jersey may be easily slipped over the doll's head. 

Sew up the sleeve seams, and turn the sleeves on to the right side. Sew the 
sleeves into the armholes, and turn the jersey on to the right side. Sew on small 
pearl buttons and woollen loops for the fastening of shoulder and neck, the woollen 
loops being made of fine crocheted chain. An alternative and easier method is 
to fasten with press-studs, which may be purchased at 20 a penny. 

N.B. — Instructions for knitting a child's jersey are given under the Standard 
VI Syllabus. 



78 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 
10. DOLL'S KILTED WOOLLEN SKIRT. 



:More Difficult Pattern in Knitting and Purling taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. 1^ oz. of any 4-ply wool. If wool 
At 2s. 8d. per lb. be employed, the cost of one Kilt will be about 2£d. (For other 
■qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 




Doll's Kilted Woollen Skirt. 



Instructions. — The kilt is knitted in one long strip, the ends of which are joined 
-together part of the way, to form the seam down the centre of the back of the kilt. 

Cast on 46 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 5J in. wide without 
■stretching. 

1st Six Rows. — Knit one row and purl one row alternately, thus finishing with a 
purl row. 

2nd Six Rows. — Purl one row and knit one row alternately, thus finishing with a 



STANDARD II. 79 

knitted row. This completes the pattern. Repeat these 12 rows 17 times more, or 
until a length of 12 in. has been knitted. Cast off loosely. 

Making up. — Sew the two ends of the strip together, except for 1£ in., to form 
a circular knitted skirt. Cut out and make up a sateen bodice to fit the doll, and 
attach the kilt to this bodice. 

ii. DOLL'S KNITTED COAT (f-LENGTH). 

Knit One Purl One employed, for Article of more Difficult Construction. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. 1| oz. of 4-ply wool, or other wool 
of suitable thickness. If wool at 3s. 9d. per lb. be employed, the cost of one coat 
will be about 3£d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — Only the best knitters should be allowed to attempt a coat as 
large as the one described below, as it involves a great deal of work for a Standard II 
child. A coat of about half the size, to fit a smaller doll, can be planned without 
difficulty from the following instructions. 

Fronts. — Each of the two fronts is knitted as follows : Cast on 28 stitches, or an 
even number which will give a width of 2\ in. of ribbed knitting without stretching. 
Work ribbed knitting of Knit One Purl One, until a length of 7 J in. has been 
knitted. Slip the commencing stitch of every row after the first. Cast off. 

Back. — Cast on 48 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 3| in. of ribbed 
knitting unstretched. Knit 1\ in. of Knit One Purl One ribbing. Cast off. 

Sleeves. — Each of the sleeves is knitted as follows : Cast on 30 stitches, or as 
many as will give ribbed knitting having a width of 2f in. unstretched. Do 4J in. of 
ribbed knitting as described under Fronts. Cast off. 

Collar. — Cast on 6 stitches, or as many as will give a width of about \ in. 
Work b\ in. of plain knitting, and then cast off. 

N.B. — In the case of dolls of different sizes, let each girl estimate for herself 
the number of stitches required to produce the dimensions necessary for her own 
doll. This will provide excellent practice in fitting and measuring. 

Making up. — Sew up the sleeve seams, and turn the sleeves on to the right 
side. Next do up the side seams of the coat by sewing the fronts on to the back. 
Leave about If in. unsewn at the top of each side seam to form the armholes. 
(Again let each girl estimate for herself the exact amount to be left unsewn, 
thus providing further exercise in fitting and measuring.) Now, starting 
from the top of each armhole in turn, sew along the shoulder seams, for a dis- 
tance of 1J in. from each end. This will leave the middle section of the back and 
fronts not sewn together along the top, the open part forming the neck opening 
of the coat. Sew the collar round this neck opening, easing it on slightly, so that 
when it is turned down, it will lie quite flat. 

Now sew in the sleeves on the wrong side of the coat ; turn back a fold at the 
wrists | in. or J in. in depth, to form a cuff. 

Turn the coat on to the right side. Lastly, attach loops of crocheted or plaited 
chain to the right-hand side of the front, and small pearl buttons to the left-hand 
side. 

iV. B. — A full-length coat, to reach to the hem of the doll's frock, may be made 
by knitting the fronts and back 10J in. long, instead of 1\ in. 



STANDARD II. 81 

12. DOLL'S KNITTED PETTICOAT. 

New Pattern, involving Knit Two Purl Two and Plain Knitting. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. Two Steel Needles — size 14. 1£ oz. 
of 4-ply wool. If wool at 2s. 8d. per lb. be employed, the cost of one Petticoat 
will be 2Jd. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 



Fig. 71. Doll's Petticoat. 

Instructions. — The 'pattern employed for this petticoat looks well on either side, 
though the one selected for the right side in the photograph of the complete garment 
(Fig. 71), is the more ornamental. An illustration is also shown (Fig. 72) of a small 
section of the reverse side of the knitting. 

6— (8i5b) 



82 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Allow only the best knitters to attempt a petticoat as large as the one des- 
cribed below, as it involves a great deal of work for a Standard II child. A petti- 
coat of about half the size, to fit a smaller doll, can be planned without difficulty 
from the following instructions. 

The petticoat is made in two sections, a front half and a back half, each of 
which is knitted as follows : Employing the bone needles, cast on 40 stitches, or 



Fig. 72. Doll's Knitted Petticoat. Reverse Side of Pattern. 

as many as will give a width of 6 in. without stretching. The number of stitches 
selected must be divisible by 4. 

Is* Row. — * Knit Two Purl Two. Repeat from * to the end of the row. 

2nd Row. — Knit plain. Repeat the first and second rows alternately, until 
5J in. has been knitted. After the first row, slip the commencing stitch of each 
row. 

Now slip the stitches on to the steel needles, and continue the pattern on these 
for three more inches. (The finer needles will produce a much narrower strip of 



STANDARD II. 83 

knitting, thus reducing the width for the bodice section of the petticoat without 
.employing narrowings.) 

Cast off all the stitches except eight at the end of the needle. Change now to 
plain knitting, and continue to knit on these eight stitches until 1\ in. has 
"been knitted to form a shoulder-strap. Cast off. 

N.B. — In the case of dolls of different sizes, let each girl estimate for herself 
the number of stitches required to produce the dimensions necessary for her own 
doll. This will provide excellent practice in fitting and measuring. 

Making up. — Place one half pf the petticoat upon the other half, so that one 
shoulder-strap is at the right-hand side of the work and the other at the left. 
Sew up the side seams of the skirt and bodice, starting from the bottom. Leave 
J in. of ribbed knitting unsewn at the top of each side seam of the bodice, to form 
the lower part of the armhole. Sew the shoulder-straps into position at the back 
and front respectively, carrying the strap attached to the front half of the work 
to the back, and the strap from the back to the front. An alternative method 
is to leave the latter strap unsewn, and to fasten by means of buttons and loops. 
This plan gives more room for taking off and on. 

Decorate the neck opening and the armholes of the petticoat by a simple crochet 
edging similar to that described under " Doll's Vest " (No. 7, St. II). Draw up the 
neck and, if necessary, the waist, by narrow ribbon, or by a chain of wool with 
pompoms attached to the ends. 

N.B. — Instructions for a full-sized knitted petticoat for a baby are given 
under the Standard V Syllabus. 



13. DOLL'S SLIPPER WITH LEATHER SOLE. 

More Difficult Exercise involving Casting-off a Section of the Stitches. 
Revision of Knit One Purl One. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. -J- oz. of any 4-ply wool. Quantity 
required for class of 50 = 6 J oz. Cost of wool at 3s. lid. per lb. = Is. 7d. (For 
•cheaper varieties of 4-ply wool and other qualities, see under Woolcraft.) Sole 
■cut out in thin leather to fit the doll's foot. 

Instructions. — The accompanying diagram (Fig. 73) shows the shape of the 
knitting opened out before the shoe is made up. 

Cast on 14 stitches, or an even number which will give a width of 1J in. 

1st Row. — K. 1, p. 1, k. 1, p. 1, k. 1, p. 1, and then knit plain to the end of 
row. 

2nd Row. — Slip the first stitch, knit the next eight stitches plain, and then do 
p. 1, k. 1, p. 1, k. 1, p. 1. 

3rd Row.— Slip 1, p. 1, k. 1, p. 1, k. 1, p. 1, and then knit plain to the end of 
row. Repeat second and third rows alternately, until 4 in. has been knitted. 

Cast off six stitches at the ribbed end of the row, i.e., along AB (see Diagram), 
and continue plain knitting on the remainder of the stitches until 1 in. of the 
narrower strip has been knitted. Cast off these eight stitches, thus forming the 
edge CF. 



84 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



r <- I" » r 



ec- iv — ■> 

Fig. 73. Doll's Slipper with Leather Sole. 

Making up. — Sew the inside edge of the narrower strip, BC, to DE, the plain 
part of the first row of the slipper, where the stitches were cast on. Turn down 
the ribbed edge to fit round the ankle, and sew the plain knitted edge on to the 
thin leather sole. The point F will thus form the toe of the slipper. Decorate 
the front by means of a woollen pompom or a bow of ribbon. 




Fig. 74. Doll's Slipper with Leather Sole. 



N.B. — Instructions for knitting a full-sized bedroom slipper are given under- 
the Standard IV Syllabus. 



STANDARD II. 85 

14 (A). KNITTED RUG FOR DOLL'S HOUSE. 

Method of Inserting Short Lengths of Wool taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. £ oz. of Double Berlin Wool, 
and & oz. of No. 4 Knitting Cotton. Cost of wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. for class of 
50 = Is. 9£d. Cost of Knitting Cotton at 2s. per lb. = Is. 2d. 




Fig. 75. Knitted Rug for Doll's House. 

Instructions. — The Berlin wool must be cut into lengths of 1 J in. each. These 
lengths, knitted into the texture, will form the " Pile " of the rug. They must be 
absolutely equal in length, and may be cut after winding the wool round a doubled 
piece of card, or round a strip of wood with a slot grooved in one side, as described 
below under " Full-sized Rug." 

Cast on 15 stitches with the knitting cotton, or an odd number of stitches 
which will produce a width of 2 in., and knit one row plain. 

2nd Row. — Knit one stitch plain. Now insert between the first and second 
stitches a length of Berlin wool, so that one end projects away from the knitter, 
and one end towards her. Knit the second stitch. Take the loose end projecting 
towards the knitter, and place it in the space between the second and third stitches, 
so that now both ends of the short length of wool are turned away from the knitter, 
and project from the other side of the work. Knit the third stitch, thus fixing 
the short length into position. See that both projecting ends of Berlin wool are 
of equal length. Proceed to insert another short length between the third and 
fourth stitches. Knit the fourth stitch. Turn in the other end of the second length 
and knit the fifth stitch. Continue this all along the row. 

3rd Row. — Knit plain. Repeat the second and third rows until a strip about 
4 in. long has been knitted. Finish with a row of plain knitting, and cast off. 

Making up. — Gum a layer of wadding on to the wrong side of the rug. Place 
over the wadding a layer of fine Hurden to form a strong lining. Turn in raw 
edges, and sew strongly all the way round to the knitted edges of the rug. Fig. 76 
shows the rug on the wrong side unlined, and the wrong side after being padded 
and lined with Hurden. 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




Hltrt»M»»»HMmnltlt»t»t fc. 



Fig. 76. Knitted Rug for Doll's House. 

14(B). INSTRUCTIONS FOR FULL-SIZED RUG FOR 
HOUSEHOLD USE. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 12. 12 lb. Beehive Turkey Rug Wool 
(6-ply plain twist), and 3f lb. of Rug Cotton (6 Threads). (This Knitting Cotton 
should not be confused with the No. 6 Knitting Cotton previously mentioned, 
which is a much finer 3-ply cotton.) Wadding and Hurden for padding and lining. 
Cost of Rug Wool at 2s. Id. per lb. = 25s. Cost of Knitting Cotton at Is. 6d. 
per lb. = 5s. 7£d. 

Instructions. — The rug described below costs about 3s. more than a rug of similar 
size made on canvas, as the knitting cotton is an expensive item. Two yards of rug 
canvas a yard wide may be obtained for 2s. 6d. The rug on canvas, however, does 
not lend itself to " Community " work for children in the same way that a knitted 
one does. 

A convenient size for a large rug is 2 yds. long and 1 yd. wide. The knitting 



STANDARD II. 



87 



will be done in strips, to be afterwards sewn firmly together. The strips should 
be knitted for the width of the rug, so that each will be 1 yd. in length. 

The cuttings of rug wool employed should be about 4 in. in length. The 
best way to cut these of uniform length is to wind the wool evenly round a strip 
of wood with a slot grooved in one side, or round a double layer of thick card ; 
a number of lengths can then be cut at once by slipping the scissors along the slot. 
A prepared piece of wood for the purpose, known as a " Gauge," may be purchased 
from any wool shop for Id. or 2d. 

Cast on 19 stitches for each strip. This will produce strips about 4 in. in 
width. A larger number of stitches may be employed if wider strips are preferred, 
but the number selected must be an odd number. Proceed as described under 
Doll's Rug, employing Rug Wool instead of Double Berlin. 

Knit a sufficient number of strips to produce the length of rug required. 

Making up. — Sew the strips together with knitting cotton, taking care that 
they fit exactly at the ends. When this has been done, lay the rug on a large 
table with the pile downwards, and, with thin adhesive, gum layers of wadding on 
to the wrong side of the rug. These layers should be tacked as well as gummed, 
to prevent any possibility of their moving when the rug is shaken. Place a 
layer of Hurden over the wadding to form a strong lining for the rug. Turn in 
the raw edges, and sew the Hurden lining to the knitted edges of the rug with 
waxed thread. 

N.B. — The making of strips for a full-sized rug is a sufficiently hard exercise 
for Standard III children, and will take the form of " Community " work. 

15(A). DOLL'S CROCHETED SHAWL. 

Double Crochet taught. 

Materials. — Coarse Bone Crochet Hook. \ oz. 4-ply wool. Cjuantity7required 
for class of 50 = 12£ oz. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 3s. 6d. (For cheaper 
qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft. 




Fig. 77. Doll's Crocheted Shawl. 



88 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — The shawl is made from a square of double crochet. 

Square for Shawl. — Commence by making a loose chain of 25, or as many 
as will measure 8 in. (For method of making chain, see General Instructions.) 

1st Row. — Commencing with the second chain from the hook, work one double 
crochet into each of the following chain stitches all along the row. (See General 
Instructions.) Make one chain and turn. 

2nd Row. — Work one double crochet into each stitch of the previous row, 
taking up both the back and the front threads. Make one chain and turn. (N.B — 
As it is a rather difficult matter to keep the edges quite level, it is a good plan 
to let the children count their stitches each row, to see that the number remains 
constant.) Repeat the second row, until 8 in. has been worked. Do not break 
off the wool. 

Border of Shawl. — Chain four, miss a stitch, and work one double crochet 
into the second stitch along the row. * Chain four, miss one, and work a double 
crochet into the next stitch. Repeat from * round each side of the shawl. 



15 (B). INSTRUCTIONS FOR FULL-SIZED CROCHETED SHAWL 
IN SIMILAR PATTERN. 

Materials. — f lb. of 4-ply wool. Cost at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 3s. 4£d. 

Instructions. — A full-sized shawl may be made in a similar manner to the one 
described above. Let the commencing chain, however, be about 40 in. in length, 
and continue to work until the shawl is about 40 in. square. 

This exercise is, owing to its size, sufficiently difficult for Standard IV children. 
One of the crocheted borders described under the work for that standard, may be 
substituted for the chain border of the doll's shawl. 



16(A). DOLL'S CROCHETED HAT. 

Second Exercise in Double Crochet. 

Materials. — Bone Crochet Hook of medium size. £ oz. of 4-ply wool. Quantity 
required for class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 3s. 6d. (For 
cheaper qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The hat is made from an oblong worked in double crochet. 

Commence by making a loose chain of 20, or as many as will measure 4 in. 
in length. 

1st Row. — Commencing with the second chain from the hook, work one double 
crochet into each of the following chain stitches all along the row. Make one 
chain and turn. 

2nd Row.— Work one double crochet into each stitch of the previous row. 
taking up the back thread only. This produces the ridged effect seen in the 
illustration. Make one chain and turn. Repeat the second row until a length 
of 6 J in. has been worked. 

Making up.— Fold the length of crochet into halves. Oversew up the two 
sides, thus producing a bag. Turn this bag on to the right side, and turn up a 



STANDARD II. 89 

fold all the way round about J in. in depth. Now take each top corner of the hat 
in turn and sew it down on to the brim. Over each point sew a decorative button 
to form a neat and pretty finish. 



Fig. 78. Doll's Crocheted Hat. 

16(B). INSTRUCTIONS FOR A FULL-SIZED CROCHETED HAT 
TO FIT A CHILD OF TEN YEARS. 

Materials. — 2 oz. 4-ply wool. Cost at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 7d. 

Instructions. — Adopt a method of working similar to that described above, but 
employ the following dimensions : — 

Commence with a chain measuring about 10£ in. in length. (The exact length 
necessary should be determined by fitting the work to the child's head when a few 
rows have been done.) Make the oblong about 17 in. long. Turn up a brim all 
round, about 2 in. in depth. 

The full-sized hat is a sufficiently difficult exercise for Standard IV children. 

17. CROCHETED PURSE FOR CHILD'S OWN USE. 

Third Exercise in Double Crochet. Finer Hook Employed. 

Materials. — Fine Bone Crochet Hook. T \ oz. of No. 4 Knitting Cotton. 
Quantity required for class of 50 = 1 lb. 6 oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = 2s. 9d. 
(The work can be made less expensive by employing a finer knitting cotton, though 
the purses will be less stout and hard-wearing.) 

The purse is made up from a crocheted oblong. 

Begin by making a loose chain of 18, or as many as will measure 3£ in. in length. 

1st Row. — Commencing with the second chain from the hook, work one double 
crochet into each of the following chain stitches all along the row. Make one 
chain and turn. 



90 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

2nd Row. — Work one double crochet into each stitch of the previous row, 
taking up both the back and front threads. Make one chain and turn. Repeat 
the second row until 5 in. has been worked. 




Fig. 79. Crocheted Purse for Child's Own Use. 

Making up. — Turn up 1J in. of the length from the bottom edge, leaving 1J in. 
of the length •from the top uncovered, to form the flap of the purse. Sew up the 
two side seams, and turn the purse on to the right side. Sew on press-studs for 
fastening the flap down at each side. Work a crocheted chain about 36 in. in 
length, and sew an end of this strongly to each side of the purse underneath the 
flap. 



STANDARD III. 



i. SMALL BOY'S KNITTED BRACES. 

Knitting Two Together, and First Method of Making an Extra Stitch 
taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Knitting-needles — size 14. J oz. of Milford's White 
Knitting Cotton, No. 6 (3 threads). This may be bought at 3d. for a 2-oz. ball. 
12 in. white Webbing. Total Cost = Id. per pair. 




Fig. 80. Knitted Braces for Small Boy. 



Instructions. — Knit two strips of knitting in the following manner : Cast on 
10 stitches, or as many as will produce in ribbed knitting of knit 1, purl 1 a width 
of J in. unstretched. Do 2\ in. of ribbed knitting of knit 1, purl 1, slipping the 
commencing stitch of every row after the first. 

Now widen as follows : Knit 2, knit twice into the next stitch (see first method 
of increasing described in General Instructions), knit 1, knit twice into next stitch, 

91 



92 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

knit 1, knit twice into next stitch, knit 1, knit twice into next stitch, knit 1. 
There will now be 14 stitches on the needle. 

Change now to plain knitting with chain edge, and knit 10 in. of this. 

Now narrow for a ribbed strip at the end of the brace as follows : Slip the 
first stitch, knit 1, knit 2 together, knit 1, knit 2 tog., knit 1, knit 2 tog., knit 1, 
knit 2 tog., knit 1. (For illustration of knitting two together, see General 
Instructions.) This reduces the stitches to 10. 

Change now to ribbing of knit 1, purl 1, and work 2\ in. in the same manner 
as described for the commencement of the brace. Cast off. Each strip thus 
knitted forms one half of the braces. 

Making up. — Join the two strips together to form the back of the braces, by 
sewing their edges firmly together for 1 in. above the ribbed ends. {See Fig. 80.) 
Cut four strips of webbing each 3 in. long. Turn in and hem the raw edges at the 
ends of each of these, and work a button-hole of the required size in each strip. 
Sew one end of each strip of webbing firmly and neatly on to the wrong side of 
the ends of the braces. (See Fig. 80.) Let the working of the button-holes and the 
attachment of the webbing be done by Standard V or VI girls. 

The braces can be lengthened as the boy grows by replacing the strips of web- 
bing by new and longer pieces. It is a simpler matter to do this than to increase 
the length of the knitting. 

2. KNITTED CASE FOR CHILD'S COLOURED BALL. 

Second Exercise in Knitting Two Together and Making a Stitch (First 
Method). 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. 1£ oz. of No. 4 Knitting Cotton of 
two contrasting colours. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = 2£d. 

Instructions. — The ball is suitable for " Community " work, several children 
knitting a section each in order to make up one ball. The cover is made up of eight 
similar sections, four in one shade, and four in another, each of which is knitted 
as follows : — 

Shaped Section. 

Cast on 2 stitches. Knit 1 row plain. 

2nd Row. — Slip 1, and knit twice into the next stitch. (See first method of 
increasing, described in General Instructions.) There are now 3 stitches on the 
needle. Knit 2 rows plain. 

5th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 into the next stitch, knit 1, producing -1 st. on the 
needle. Knit 2 rows plain. In the plain rows, always slip the first stitch of each 
row. 

8th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 into next stitch, knit 2 again into next stitch, knit 
last stitch, producing 6 stitches on the needle. Knit 4 rows plain. 

13th Row.— Slip 1, knit 2 into the next stitch, knit 2, knit 2 into the next stitch, 
knit 1, producing 8 Stitches on the needle. Knit 6 rows plain. 

20^ .Row.— Slip 1, knit 2 into the next stitch, knit 4, knit 2 into the next stitch, 
knit 1, producing 10 stitches on the needle. Knit 9 rows plain. 

30th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 into the next stitch, knit 6, knit 2 into the next 
stitch, knit 1, producing 12 stitches on the needle. Knit 20 plain rows. 



STANDARD III. 



93 



5lst Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 together, knit 6, knit 2 together, knit 1, thus reducing 
the number of stitches to 10. Knit 9 plain rows. 

61st Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit 4, knit 2 tog., 
number of stitches to 8. Knit 6 plain rows. 

68th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit 2, knit 2 tog., 
number of stitches to 6. Knit 4 plain rows. 

73rd Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit 2 tog., knit 1, 
of stitches to 4. Knit 2 plain rows. 



knit 1, thus reducing the 
knit 1, thus reducing the 
thus reducing the number 




Fig. 81. Knitted Case for Child's Coloured Ball. 



76th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit the last stitch, thus reducing the number 
of stitches to 3. Knit 2 plain rows. 

79th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., thus reducing the stitches back again to 2 with 
which the work was commenced. Knit 1 plain row, and cast off. 

Circle for Top and Bottom of Ball. 

Two circular pieces of knitting are required, each of which should be knitted 
as follows : — 

Cast on 3 stitches. 

1st Row. — Slip 1 (purlwise, so as to produce chain edge), knit 2 into the next 
stitch, knit 1, thus increasing the number of stitches to 4. Knit 1 plain row. 

3rd Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 into the next stitch, knit 2 again into the next stitch, 
Jcnit 1, producing 6 stitches on the needle. Knit 1 plain row. 



94 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

5th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 into the next stitch, knit 2, knit 2 into the next stitch, 
knit 1, thus producing 8 stitches on the needle. Knit 1 plain row. 

7 th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 into the next stitch, knit 4, knit 2 into the next stitch, 
knit 1, thus producing 10 stitches on the needle. Knit 3 plain rows. 

11th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit 4, knit 2 tog., knit 1, thus reducing the 
number of stitches to 8. Knit 1 plain row. 

13th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit 2, knit 2 tog., knit 1, thus reducing the 
number of stitches to 6. Knit 1 plain row. 

15th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit 2 tog., knit 1, reducing the number of 
stitches to 4. Knit 1 plain row. 

17th Row. — Slip 1, knit 2 tog., knit 1, thus bringing the number of stitches 
back again to 3, the original number. Cast off. Pull each piece of knitting into 
a circular shape. 

Making up. — Oversew together the edges of the sections, leaving open one 
seam only ; place a light-coloured section alternately with a dark one. Now 
stuff the cover as tightly as possible with cuttings or rovings of wool, and oversew 
up the last seam. 

It will be found that a small hole has been left at the top and bottom of the 
ball, where the points of the sections meet. Cover these holes by neatly sewing 
over them the small circular pieces of knitting described above. (See Fig. 81.) 

3. BABY GIRL'S KNITTED STAYS. 

Third Exercise in Knitting Two Together and Making a Stitch (First 
Method) . 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 13. 2 oz. of Milford's White Knitting 
Cotton, No. 6 (3 threads). The cost of one pair of stays is 3d., as the cotton may 
be purchased at 3d. for a 2-oz. ball. Tapes for tying. 

Instructions. — Commence at the centre of the back of the stays, as follows. 

First Half Back. 

Cast on 48 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting having a width of 6 
or 6£ in. unstretched. (The stays may readily be made deeper if desired, by casting 
on more stitches to commence.) Begin to work plain knitting, and continue this 
until 4 in. has been knitted. (N.B. — The whole of the stays must be knitted 
with chain edge.) 

First Armhole. 

Now work the decreasings for the armhole curve as follows : — 

1st Row. — Slip the first stitch in the usual manner, knit two together, and then 
do plain knitting along the remainder of the needle. 

2nd Row. — Knit plain. Repeat the first and second rows of the armhole 
alternately, until the number of stitches on the needle has been reduced to 36. 
Finish the decreasings with a row knitted like the first row. 

Now commence the increasings for the remaining half of the armhole curve as 
follows : — 

1st Row. — Knit plain along the needle until the last two stitches are reached. 
Knit twice into the stitch before the last (see First Method of Increasing, General 
Instructions), and then knit the last stitch. 



STANDARD III. 95 

2nd Row. — Knit plain all along the row. Repeat the above two rows alternately, 
until there are once more 48 stitches on the needle. 

Front of Stays. 

Do plain knitting with chain edge until 7 in. has been knitted past, the armhole. 
Second Armhole. 

Knit as described under First Armhole. 




Fig. 82. Baby Girl's Knitted Stays. 

Second Half Back. 

Knit as described under the first half'back. 1 ^ Cast off. 

Shoulder Straps. 

Knit each shoulder-strap as^follows : Cast on eight stitches, or as many as will 
give a width of 1 in. unstretched. Knit a strip of plain knitting with chain edge 
5£ in. long. 

Making up. — Oversew the shoulder-straps into position, as shown in Fig. 82. 
Fasten by means of six tapes each 8 in. long. Sew the tapes on the edge of the 
right-hand side of the back, and at a distance of 1 in. from the edge on the left 
side. If greater warmth is desired, line the little stays with flannel. 



96 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

4. DOLL'S SCARF KNITTED ON THREE NEEDLES. 

Casting on and Knitting on Three Needles taught. 

Materials.— Four Steel Needles— size 15. & oz. of White Shetland Wool, 
(2-ply), or other fine wool or knitting cotton. Quantity required for class of 50 = 
9£ oz. Cost of same at 4s. 8d. per lb. = 2s. 9£d. (For other qualities of 2-ply 
wool, see under Woolcraft.) 




Doll's Scarf 



Instructions. — Cast on 10 stitches on each of three needles, or as many as will 
produce doubled knitting 1 J in. in width. After their previous practice in casting on, 
children will find little difficulty in doing this. (The method of casting on on three 
needles is fully described in General Instructions.) Instruct them how to draw the 
third needle tightly up to the first, and let them with their fourth needle commence to 
work round the stitches on the three needles. Advise the children always to pull 
the wool tightly in knitting the first stitch of each needle, in order to avoid a line 



STANDARD III, 97 

of slack knitting between the needles. Let them do a circular strip of plain knitting 
about 11 in. long, and then cast off. 

Making up. — Gather up the ends of the scarf firmly, and suspend a full tassel 
from each. (For method of making tassels, see General Instructions.) 

Instructions for making a full-sized scarf on three needles are given under 
Standard IV Syllabus. 

5. MARBLE BAG (FOR BROTHER). 

Second Exercise in Casting on and Knitting on Three Needles. Second 
Method of Making a Stitch taught. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 14. § oz. of No. 4 Knitting Cotton. 
Cost of one bag, the knitting cotton being 2s. per lb. = Id. 




Fig. 84. Boy's Marble Bag. 

Instructions. — Cast on 20 stitches on each of three needles, or as many as will 
produce doubled knitting 4 in. in width. Do 4 J in. of plain knitting, taking especial 
care that the cotton is drawn up tightly between each pair of needles. In the next 
round the holes are formed, through which draw-strings are passed for closing up 
the bag. These holes will be produced as follows : — 

* Knit three stitches, put the wool forward under the point of the right-hand 
needle, and over it again to the back, thus making a stitch (see General Instruc- 
tions), knit two stitches together. Repeat from *all the way round. Now do plain 
knitting again, until another J in. has been worked. Cast off. 

7— (8i 5 b) 



98 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Making up. — Turn the circular piece of knitting on to the wrong side,. flatten 
it out, and sew the two bottom edges neatly together where the knitting was first 
cast on, thus forming a bag. Turn this bag on to the right side. Now make two 
plaits or crocheted chains of knitting cotton, each 14 in. long. Thread a bodkin 
with one of the plaits, pass it through all the holes, and then join the two ends neatly 
together. Do exactly the same with the second plait, joining its ends at the oppo- 
site side of the work. Two plaited handles now project, one from each side of the 
bag. It will be found that when these are pulled simultaneously, the bag closes up 
in an efficient manner. 

6. LUNCH BAG FOR CHILD'S OWN USE. 

Knit Two and Purl Two on Three Needles introduced for Border 
of Bag. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 14. J% oz. of No. 6 Knitting Cotton. 
Quantity required for class of 50 = 1 lb. 6 oz. Cost of same at 2s. per lb. = 2s. 9d. 

Instructions. — Cast on 20 stitches on each of three needles, or as many as will 
produce doubled knitting 4 in. in width. The number of stitches chosen must be 




Fig. 85. Lunch Bag for Child's Own Use. 



STANDARD III. 99 

divisible by 4. Do 3 in. of plain knitting. Change to ribbed knittinglof knit 2 
purl 2, and continue this for 1J in. Cast off. This ribbed knitting forms k suitable 
border for the bag. 

Making up. — Place the knitting in a flat position to form a bag, and! sew to- 
gether the two bottom edges where the stitches were first cast on. Make q. plaited 
or crocheted chain, about 36 in. in length to suspend the bag round the; child's 
neck. Sew an end of this to each top corner of the bag. The ends should be 
attached to the inside of the bag. 

7. DOLL'S MUFF. 

Second Exercise in Knit Two Purl Two on Three Needles. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 15. J oz. 3-ply wool. Cost of sariie at 
3s. lid. per lb. = fd. (For other qualities of 3-ply wool, see under Woolcraft,.) 




Fig. 86. Doll's Muff. 

Instructions. — Cast on 48 stitches, that is, 16 on each of three needles. Work 
■2 in. of ribbed knitting of knit 2 purl 2. Cast off loosely. 

Making up. — The muff may be padded with cotton wool, and a sateen lining 
:sewn in, or it may be left unlined. (Directions for padding and lining a muff are 
given under the Standard V Syllabus.) Draw the ends of the muff up slightly 
by means of a gathering thread. Make a plaited or crocheted chain of wool to 
form a neck cord, and add tassels at the sides of the muff for decoration, as shown 
in Fig. 86. (The method of making the tassels is given under General Instructions.) 

Instructions for making a child's muff in a more difficult pattern are given under 
■the Standard V Syllabus. 



100 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

KNITTED CUFFS FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR. 

REViiior/ Exercise in Knit Two Purl Two on Three Needles. 

Materials.— Four Steel Needles— size 14. J oz. of 4-ply wool will make a pair 
of cliffs. [ Cost of same at 3s. 1 Id. per lb. = 1 Jd. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool. 

see Aindifir Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 87. Knitted Cuff for Child's Own Wear. 

Instructions. — Cast on 52 stitches, putting 16 on each of two needles, and 20 on- 
one. Knit 4 in. of ribbing, knit 2 purl 2, and cast off loosely. For casting off, 
employ the second method described under General Instructions. Knit the second- 
cuff in the same manner. 

9(A). DOLL'S PETTICOAT, KNITTED IN STRIPS. 

Method of Making a Stitch at the Commencement of a Row, and Practice- 
in Knitting Two Together. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 8. Two Steel Needles — size 16. J oz. of 
any 4-ply wool. Cost of same at 2s. 8d. per lb. = ljd. (For other qualities of 
4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The petticoat consists of eight strips, each of which is knitted as- 
follows : Cast on 9 stitches with the bone needles, or as many as will give a width 
of 1J in. Put the right-hand needle under the wool before placing it in the first 
stitch. This has the result of making a stitch at the commencement of the row. 
(See General Instructions on Increasings.) Knit 3 stitches, knit 2 stitches together,. 



STANDARD III. 101 

knit 4 stitches. This completes the row. There will still be 9 stitches on the needle. 
Repeat this row until 4| in. has been knitted. 

Now slip the stitches on to No. 16 knitting-needles, and change to plain knit- 
ting ; there will be now no making of stitches or knitting two together. Slip 
the first stitch of each row. The change to fine needles will shape the petticoat, 
so that it is less full at the waist. Do 1 in. of this plain knitting on steel needles, 
and then cast off. 




Fig. 88. Doll's Petticoat Knitted in Strips. 



Making up. — Sew together the eight strips, leaving one seam open for 2 in. 
down the centre of the back to form the placket-hole. 

The petticoat may be attached to a bodice, or may be drawn up at the waist 
by a runner. If it is to be drawn up without a bodice, crochet the following chain 
edge round the top, through which a runner may be passed : 1 double crochet 
into a stitch, * chain 1, miss a stitch, and double crochet into the next stitch. 
Repeat from * right round the waist of the petticoat. Pass through the small 
loops formed, a runner of ribbon, tape, or crocheted chain. If a chain is employed, 
attach a woollen pompom to each end. 

Round the scallops at the bottom of the petticoat work the following edging : 
* 1 double crochet into a stitch, miss a stitch, 3 treble into next stitch, miss a 
stitch. Repeat from * all round the scallops. 

N.B. — The crochet borders may be done by a girl in a higher standard. 



102 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

9(b). INSTRUCTIONS FOR KNITTING A PETTICOAT IN 
STRIPS FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 6. Two Steel Needles — size 15. About 
14 oz. of 4-ply wool. 

Instructions. — The petticoat here described will fit a child of 9 or 10 years. By 
decreasing or increasing the width or length of the strips, the petticoat may be 
altered to fit a child or adult of any build or height. 

It consists of about 14 strips, each of which is knitted as follows : Cast on 
21 stitches with the bone needles. Make a stitch at the commencement of the row, 
as described under " Doll's Petticoat " above. Knit 9 stitches, knit 2 together, 
knit 10 stitches. Counting the stitch made at the beginning, there will still be 
21 stitches on the needle. Repeat this row until a sufficient length has been 
knitted to reach from the hem of the girl's skirt to within 3 in. of her waist. (15 in. 
will be an average length for a girl of 9 or 10 years.) Now slip the stitches on to 
size 15 steel needles, and change to plain knitting, slipping the first stitch at the 
commencement of each row. Do 3 in. of knitting on the steel needles and cast off. 

N.B. — It may be found that less or more than 14 strips are required, according 
to the slimness of the girl to be fitted. This should be ascertained by measuring 
her as the work proceeds. 

Making up. — Sew together the strips, leaving one seam open for 6 in. down 
the centre of the back to form the placket-hole. Attach the petticoat to a bodice 
made of flannel or flannelette. As a petticoat of this description wears for a long 
time, it is better to have a bodice that can be replaced by a larger one as the 
child grows than a knitted one which is difficult to replace. Work the same 
crocheted edging round the scallops at the bottom as the one described under 
" Doll's Petticoat." 



io. KNITTED TEA-COSY. 

Method of Joining Wool taught. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. Double Berlin Wool of five shades. 
5 oz. will make two Tea-Cosies. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = Is. 5d. 

Instructions. — For the tea-cosy shown in the illustration, five shades of blue 
wool, ranging from navy to pale blue, were employed. The cosy is made in two 
halves, each of which is knitted as follows : Cast on 36 stitches in the darkest 
shade of wool, or as many as will give a width of 8 in. without stretching. The 
number of stitches selected must be divisible by 3. 

1st Row. — * Knit 2 purl 1. Repeat from * all along the row. 

2nd Row. — Knit plain. Slip the commencing stitch of every row after the 
first. Repeat the first and second rows alternately, until 1J in. has been knitted 
in the darkest shade. Break off the wool. 

Join on now with wool one shade lighter than that first employed. (See 
General Instructions.) Knit 1J in. as before. Break off. 

Work 1J in. in a similar manner with each of the next two shades of wool. 
Four shades of wool have now been employed. 

Join on the palest shade of wool and knit J in. of the pattern, finishing with 



STANDARD III. 



103 



a row of knit 2 purl 1. Then, instead of doing plain knitting for the next row, 
work as follows : Slip 1, make 1 (see second method of increasing, General 
Instructions), knit 2 together, * knit 1, make 1, knit 2 together. Repeat from * 
to the end of the row. This will produce a row of holes, through which a woollen 
chain will afterwards be passed to draw up the top of the cosy. 

Change back to the pattern, and continue this till 1J in. has been worked in 
the palest shade of the wool. Cast off loosely. 

If desired, a lining of plain knitting may be made for each half of the cosy. 




Fis. 89. Knitted Tea-Cosy. 



If this is done, sew the knitted lining neatly to each half of the cosy before it is 
made up. 

Making up. — Place the two halves of the cosy facing each other. Sew up 
the side seams for \\ in. from the bottom and 1 in. from the top, leaving the 
spaces between unjoined, for the spout and handle of the pot. 

Decorate the top edge of the cosy with the following simple crochet chain : 
1 double crochet into a stitch, * 5 chain, miss 2 stitches, 1 double crochet into the 
next stitch. Repeat from * all round the top. Employ the darkest shade of 
wool for this edging, as it will form a pleasing contrast to the pale shade. 

Make a crocheted woollen chain about 22 in. long (also of the darkest shade 
of wool), pass it through the holes formed for the purpose, and draw the cosy up 



104 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



at the top. Attach full pompoms to the ends of the chain, and tie these ends in a 
bow. If preferred, the cosy may be drawn up with ribbon. 

N. B. — The cosy described above will fit a teapot holding from 1 \ pt=. to 1 qt. If 
a larger size is required, cast on more stitches, selecting a number which is a multiple 
of 3. The most satisfactory way is to let the children measure the size of the 
pot for which the cosy is required, and to cast on the number of stitches necessary 
to fit the pot. 

II. DOLL'S JERSEY ON THREE NEEDLES. 

Two Varieties of Ribbed Knitting employed in Making Article of more 
Difficult Construction. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 14. 1J oz. of any 4-ply wool. Cost of 
same at 2s. 8d. per lb. = 2£d. (For other qualities of wool, see Woolcraft.) 




Doll's Jersey Knitted on Three Needles. 



Instructions. — Body of Jersey. 

Cast on 84 stitches, that is, 28 on each of three needles, or as many as will 
give doubled knitting (ribbed) 3£ in. in width unstretched. The number of stitches 
selected must be divisible by 4. Do about J in. of ribbed knitting, knit 2 purl 2. 
This will form the turned-up border at the bottom of the jersey. Change 
now to ribbing of knit 1 purl 1, and knit 4 in. of this pattern. The base of the 
armholes has now been reached, and the stitches must be arranged on two needles 



STANDARD III. 105 

instead of three. Place 42 stitches on each, so that the knitting for the front of 
the jersey may be worked on one needle, and the knitting for the back on the second 
needle. Leave the 42 stitches on the back needle for a time, or pass them on to 
a piece of wool, and knit backwards and forwards on the front needle in the knit 1 
purl 1 pattern, until 1 J in. has been knitted in this way. Now cast off 1 1 stitches 
at the commencement of the row, and then do knit 1 purl 1 to the end of the 
needle. At the commencement of the next row, again cast off 11 stitches, thus 
leaving 20 stitches not cast off in the centre of the pin. Now change the pattern 
to knit 2 purl 2 for the neckband of the jersey. Do about half-an-inch of knitting 
on these 20 stitches, and then cast off. 

Now join the wool on again at the commencement of the 42 stitches left on 
the needle for the back. Knit the back of the jersey from the armhole upwards, 
exactly as was described for the front. After completing the ribbing for the 
neckband, cast off. 
Sleeves. 

Knit each sleeve as follows : Cast on 28 stitches, that is, 8 on each of two 
needles and 12 on one. Do ribbing of knit 2 purl 2 for about £ in., to form the 
turned-up cuff at the wrist. Change to the knit 1 purl 1 ribbing, work 3J in. 
in this pattern, and cast off loosely. 

Making up. — Turn the jersey on to the wrong side, and sew up one shoulder 
seam, and the seam at one side of the neckband. The shoulder and neck opening 
at the opposite side will be left open, so that the jersey may be easily slipped over 
the doll's head. Sew the sleeves into the armholes, and turn the jersey on to the 
right side. Sew on small woollen loops and pearl buttons for the fastening of 
shoulder and neck, or fasten with press-studs. 

12. DOLL'S HAT. 

Knit One Purl Two, and Knit Two Purl One taught for Pattern of 
Hat. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 14. f oz. of any 4-ply wool. If wool 
at 3s. lid. per lb. be employed, the cost of one hat will be about 2d. (For other 
qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 91. Doll's Hat. 



106 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — Brim of Hat. 

Cast on 72 stitches, that is, 24 on each of three needles, or as many as will 
produce knitting measuring 8 in. round without stretching. Knit 10 rounds of 
ribbing of knit 2 purl 1, This completes the brim. (An alternative and easier 
pattern is ribbing of k. 1, p. 1. The number of stitches chosen must be divisible 
by 3 or by 2, according to pattern selected.) 

Fold. 

Knit 4 rounds of plain knitting to form a natural fold. 

Crown of Hat. 

Change to ribbing of knit 1 purl 2, and work 2\ in. in this pattern. (If, how- 
ever, k. 1, p. 1 has been employed in knitting brim, use it also for crown of hat.) 
Cast off loosely, employing the second method described under General Instructions. 

Making up. — Turn the work on to the wrong side and flatten it to form a bag 
shape. Sew together the open ends where the casting-off was done. Turn the 
bag on to the right side, and fold back the brim. Now take each top corner of 
the hat in turn, and sew it down on to the brim. Fix a woollen pompom on each 
of the sewn-down comers, to form a prettv finish to the hat. 



13. KNITTED HAT FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR. 

Same Pattern Employed as in Preceding Exercise, but on Larger Scale, 
and on Two Needles. 




Fig. 92. Hat for Child's Own Wear. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. 1} oz. 4-ply wool. Cost of same at 
4s. 6d. per lb. is about 6d. Two Pearl Buttons. 

Instructions. — This hat will fit a child of 9 or 10 years of age. It is knitted in 



STANDARD III. 107 

a long strip, commencing with the double fold for the front brim, and finishing 
with the double fold for the back brim. 

Double Fold for Front Brim. 

Cast on 66 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting having a width of 
10J in. without stretching. The exact width necessary should be determined by 
measuring round the head of the intended wearer. The number chosen should be 
divisible by 3 or 2, according to pattern selected. 

1st Row. — * Knit 1 purl 2. Repeat from * to the end of the row. An 
alternative and easier pattern is ribbing of k. 1, p. 1. 

2nd Row. — * Knit 2 purl 1. Repeat from * to the end of the row. 

Repeat these two rows alternately six times more, slipping the commencing stitch 
of each row. This will make 14 rows in all, and will complete the under part of 
the front brim. This under part should be about 1£ in. in depth. Knit 4 plain 
rows to form a natural fold between the under and upper part of the brim. Com- 
mence again to work the first and second rows alternately, and do 18 rows to form 
the upper part of the brim, or as many rows as will measure If- in. in depth. Knit 
4 more plain rows, to form another natural fold between the brim and crown of 
hat. 

Crown of Hat. 

1st Row. — * Knit 2 purl 1. Repeat from * to the end of the row. If, however, 
k. 1, p. 1 has been employed in knitting the brim, use it also for the crown of 
the hat. 

2nd Row. — * Knit 1 purl 2. Repeat from * to the end of the row. 

Repeat these two rows alternately until 12 in. has been knitted for the crown 
of the hat. The last row for the crown should be knit 1 purl 2. Knit 4 plain 
rows, to form a natural fold between the crown and the back brim. 

Double Fold for Back Brim. 

1st Row. — * Knit 1 purl 2. Repeat from * to the end of the row. 

2nd Row. — * Knit 2 purl 1. Repeat from * to the end of the row. 

Continue to knit these two rows alternately, until 18 rows, or If in., have been 
knitted. Knit 4 plain rows for the fold. Commence again to work the first and 
second rows alternately, and do 14 rows, or 1£ in., to form the under part of the 
back brim. Cast off loosely. 

Making up. — Double the strip, so that the knit 1 purl 2 side of the crown is 
outermost. Sew up the two side seams neatly. Fold the brim into position all 
round the hat. Now take each top corner of the hat in turn, and sew it down 
on to the brim. Fix a large pearl button on to each of the sewn-down corners. 
Buttons covered with a small square of plain knitting may be employed if 
preferred. 

N.B. — The hat described above will fit a girl of 8, 9, or 10 years. It will not 
tea difficult matter for any individual girl to vary the number of stitches and the 
measurements to suit her own purpose. She may thus make a hat of the same 
pattern to fit a younger or an older child, as may be required. 



108 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

14. TIE KNITTED IN SPIDER PATTERN. 

New Ornamental Stitch taught. 

Materials.— Two Steel Needles — size 14. 1 Ball of " Coton Perle " D.M.C., size 5. 
Cost of same = 2d. 




Fig. 93. Tie Knitted in Spider Pattern. 

Instructions. — The children will enjoy knitting this tie as a present for some 
friend or relation. 

Long End of Tie. 

Cast on 12 stitches. 

1st Row. — Knit the first stitch in the ordinary manner. Insert the needle in 
the second stitch, put the cotton once round the points of both needles, and then 
place it round the right-hand needle in the usual manner, and knit the stitch ; 
draw the loop through the cotton that was placed round the two needles as well 
as through the stitch. (See Fig. 94.) This is known as " Spider Stitch." 
Repeat this all along the needle till the last stitch is reached. Knit this last 
stitch plain. 



STANDARD III. 10& 

2nd Row. — Slip the first stitch, and then knit plain all along the row. 

3rd Row. — Slip the first stitch, and do spider stitch all along the row until 
the last stitch is reached. Knit this stitch plain. Repeat the second and third 
rows alternately, until 15 in. has been knitted. 




Fig. 94. Method of Working Spider Pattern for Tie. 



Narrow Portion for Neck. 

Narrow as follows for the part to be slipped under the collar : Slip the first 
stitch, knit 1, knit 2 tog. four times, knit 2. This reduces the stitches to eight. 

Proceed with the pattern as before, until 11 in. of the narrower strip has 
been knitted. 

Short End of Tie. 

Widen for the second end of the tie as follows : Slip 1, knit 2, raise a stitch 
(by taking a loop from the row below and knitting it ; see General Instructions oil 
Increasings), knit 1, raise a stitch, knit 1, raise a stitch, knit 1, raise a stitch, knit 2. 
There will now be 12 stitches on the needle, as at the beginning. 

Proceed with the pattern as before, until another 13 in. has been knitted for 
the second end of the tie. Cast off. 

N.B. — The best dimensions for a man's tie are as follows : Long end, 12. in ;. 
narrow neck portion, 16 in. ; short end, 8 in. 



110 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 
IS (A). DOLL'S CROCHETED BONNET. 



Treble Stitch taught. 

Materials. — Bone Crochet Hook of medium size. J oz. of 4-ply wool. Quantity 
required for class of 50 = 12J oz. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 3s 6 jd. (For 
cheaper qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 



■->B 



4 l'... 



-2\ -> p 



< 7 i 

Fig. 95. Doll's Crocheted Bonnet. 



Instructions. — The accompanying diagram shows the shape of the crochet 
before the bonnet is made up. 

Portion to Fit round Top and Sides of Head. 

Commence by making a loose chain of 30, or as many as will measure 7 in. 
in length. (G to H.) 

Is/ Row. — Commencing with the third chain from the hook, work 1 treble into 
each of the following chain stitches all along the row. (For method of working 
" Trebles," see General Instructions.) Make 3 chain and turn. 

2nd Row. — Work 1 treble into each stitch of the previous row, taking up the 
back thread only, in order to produce the ribbed effect seen in Fig. 96. Make 3 
chain and turn. 

Repeat the first and second rows until 3 in. has been worked. Break off 
the wool. 

Back of Bonnet. 

1st Row. — Join on the wool again at a distance of 2\ in. along the row, that is, 
at the point E. Make 3 chain to form a treble, and then work 1 treble into each 
of the next eight stitches, or as many as will measure about 2 in. Leave the 
remaining stitches from B to C untouched, and turn with 3 chain. 

2nd Row. — Work 1 treble into the top of each of the 9 treble of the previous 
row, taking up the back thread only as before. 



STANDARD III. Ill 

Repeat these two rows until 1\ in. of the narrower width has been worked. 
Break off the wool, and neatly darn in all ends. 

Making up. — Turn down the rectangular flap which forms the back of the 
bonnet, and sew AB to CB, and DE to FE. Turn the bonnet on to the right side. 




Fig. 96. Doll's Crocheted Bonnet. 

Decorate the front edge of the bonnet with the following border : Join on 
the wool, * make 4 chain, miss 1 stitch, and work a double crochet into the next 
stitch. Repeat from * right along the edge. 

Fold back from the front of the bonnet a flap \ in. in depth to form the 
turned-back fold shown in the illustration. 



15(B). FULL-SIZED BONNET FOR CHILD OF EIGHT OR NINE 

YEARS OLD. 

2 oz. 4-ply wool. Cost at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 7d. 

Instructions. — Work in a similar manner to the Doll's Bonnet, but observe 
the following dimensions — 

Length of chain, GH, about 15 in. ; width of portion to fit round sides and 
top of head and to form flap, i.e., the distance GC, about 7 in. ; distance FE, 
about 5£ in. ; distance EB, about 4 in. ; distance BC, about 5£ in. ; depth of 
back of bonnet, i.e., distance BA, about 5£ in. 

Whenever possible, measure the head of the child for whose wear the hat is 
intended, and determine the measurements accordingly. The full-sized bonnet is a 
sufficiently difficult exercise for Standard IV children. 



112 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

16(A). DOLL'S CROCHETED PETTICOAT. 

Second Exercise in Treble Stitch. Simple Border Pattern taught. 

Materials.— Coarse Bone Crochet Hook, f oz. of 4-ply wool. Cost of 
same at 2s. 3d. per lb. = ljd. (For better qualities of 4-ply wool, see under 
Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 97. Doll's Crocheted Petticoat. 

Instructions. — Make a loose chain of 21, or as many as will measure about 5 in. 
in length. 

1st Row. — Commencing with the second chain from the hook, work 1 double 
crochet in each of the next 4 chain. Change now to treble stitch, and work 1 
treble into each of the remaining chain stitches along the row. 

2nd Row. — Turn with 3 chain, and work 1 treble into each stitch of the previous 
row, until the last 4 stitches are reached. Into each of these work 1 double 
crochet. The working of the d.c.'s in the last 4 stitches will have the effect of 
narrowing the work at one end to form the waist. (In the case of each treble and 
double crochet, take up both the back and front threads of the previous row.) 

3rd Row. — Turn with 1 chain, and work 1 double crochet into each of the first 
4 stitches ; then work 1 treble into each remaining stitch along the row. 



STANDARD III. 113 

Repeat the second and third rows alternately until the waist measurement, 
(i.e., the length of the end where the double crochet has been worked), is 8 in. 

Making up. — Fold the work in halves, and sew together the back seam for a 
distance of 3 J in. from the bottom, leaving open 1£ in. at the top for the placket- 
hole. Turn the work on to the right side. Work the following simple border 
round the bottom — 

Make 1 double crochet in a stitch, * miss a stitch, 4 treble into the next stitch, 
1 double crochet into next stitch. Repeat from * all the way round. If the 
border seems too full, occasionally miss a stitch between the 4 treble and the 
double crochet immediately following. 



16 (B). INSTRUCTIONS FOR FULL-SIZED CROCHETED 
PETTICOAT TO FIT A CHILD OF TEN OR ELEVEN YEARS. 

Materials. — About 14 oz. of 4-ply wool. Cost of same at 2s. 8d. per lb. = 2s. 4d. 

Instructions. — Work as described under Doll's Petticoat, with the following 
alterations in dimensions : — 

Let the commencing chain be about 21 in. long. (The exact length required 
must be ascertained by measuring the girl for whom the petticoat is intended.) 
To form the waistband, work double crochet for a distance of 3| in. down instead 
of for 4 stitches only as described under Doll's Petticoat ; and, when working to- 
wards the top of the garment, finish the last 3^ in. by double crochet for the waist- 
band. Continue the pattern until the waist measure is about 24 in. in length. 
(Again measure the intended wearer to ascertain the exact size required.) 

Making up. — Sew up the back seam, leaving open 7 in. at the top for the 
placket-hole. Turn the work on to the right side. Work a crocheted border 
round the bottom, as described under Doll's Petticoat. 

The making of a full-sized petticoat is an exercise sufficiently difficult for 
Standard V children. 



17. CROCHETED CUFFS FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR. 

Third Exercise in Treble Stitch. 

Materials. — A medium Bone Crochet Hook. £ oz. of 4-ply wool for the pair. 
Cost, if wool at 3s. lid. per lb. is employed = l£d. per pair. (For other qualities 
of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — Make a chain of 24 loops, or 4 in. long. 

1st Row. — Make 1 extra chain to turn with. Work 1 d.c. into each of the 
24 chain. 

2nd Row. — Turn with 3 chain. Work 1 treble on each d.c. of the previous row. 
Repeat the above two rows 10 times more, or until 6 in. of crochet has been worked 
to go round the wrist. Break the wool off, leaving a sufficient length for the pur- 
pose of joining the cuff, and draw the last loop through. Sew the commencing 

8— (815B) 



114 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



row and the finishing row of the cuff together with the end of wool left, making 
the join on the wrong side of the work. 

Border. 

Commence at one end of the joining seam and proceed as follows : 1 d.c. into 
the end of the seam ; * chain 5, miss the end of the row of trebles, and work 1 d.c. 




Fig. 98. Crocheted Cuffs for Child's Own Wear. 



into the end of the first row of double crochet. Repeat from * all round the end 
of the cuff until the seam is reached. Finish off both the commencing and finish- 
ing ends of the wool by darning them neatly down the wrong side of the seam. 
Work a similar border round the other end of the cuff. 



18. CROCHETED HAIR-BAND FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR. 

Harder Revision Exercise in Double Crochet. 



Materials. — Coarse Steel Crochet Hook — about size 2. 
Silkie," medium size, or fine Knitting Cotton. One ball of 
and will make three hair-bands. 



i of a ball of " O-So- 
O-So-Silkie " costs 2d., 



Instructions. — Crochet a loose chain long enough to fit over the top of the girl's 
head. The number of chain made for the hair-band shown in the photograph was 
60, and the length was 1 1 in. * Work double crochet into each stitch of the chain, 



STANDARD III. 115 

except the first. Turn with 1 chain, and repeat from *. Work 7 rows of double 
crochet in all. Cut the thread, draw the end through, and fasten off securely. 

Making up. — Decorate each end of the hair-band with a rosette of narrow 
ribbon. Elastic of the length required to fit under the child's hair should be sewn 
to the ends of the hair-band. 




Fig. 99. Crocheted Hair-band for Girl's Own Wear. 



STANDARD IV. 



i. TRIANGULAR HEAD-WRAP. 

Revision of Spider Stitch in Article of more Difficult Construction. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. Bone Crochet Hook of medium size. 
2£ oz. of Andalusian Wool. Cost of wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 9d. (For other 
varieties of Andalusian Wool, see Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 100. Triangular Head-Wrap. 
116 



STANDARD IV. 117 

Instructions. — First Half of Shawl. 

Commence at the point, by casting on 3 stitches. 

Is* Row. — Make a stitch at the commencement of the row, by putting the 
needle under the wool before knitting. (See Fifth Method of Increasing, General 
Instructions.) Knit the first stitch, and then work spider stitch into all the 
remaining stitches. A full description of this stitch is given under " Knitted Tie 
in Spider Stitch " in Standard III Syllabus. (See p. 108.) 

2nd Row. — Slip the first stitch, and work spider stitch into all the remaining 
stitches. Repeat the first and second rows alternately, until there are 56 stitches 
on the needle. 

Then, instead of making a stitch at the commencement of every other row, 
work 3 rows like the second row between the widening rows, instead of 1 row. 
This will have the effect of making the widening more gradual, and will ensure 
a better fit round the front part of the head. Continue to widen at the com- 
mencement of every fourth row, until there are 62 stitches on the needle. Knit 
two rows without widening or narrowing. 

Second Half of Shawl. 

Now commence to narrow for the second half of the shawl as follows : — 

Is* Row. — Slip the first stitch, work spider stitch all along the row, and knit 
the last two stitches together. In knitting the latter, put the wool over twice as 
usual to form a spider stitch. (The two stitches knitted together must be at the 
same end of the needle at which the increasings were made in the first half of the 
wrap.) 

2nd Row. — Slip the first stitch, and work spider stitch in all the remaining 
stitches. 

3rd and 4th Rows. — Like the second row. Repeat rows 1 to 4 until there are 
56 stitches on the needle. 

Change now, and decrease more rapidly by repeating the first and second rows 
only, alternately, omitting the third and fourth rows. Continue to decrease thus 
at the end of every other needle, until only three stitches remain on the needle 
Cast off. 

Crocheted Border. 

If the border here described proves too difficult for Standard IV children, have 
it worked by Standard V or VI girls, or substitute one of the simpler borders 
previously given. 

1st Row of Border. — * Work 1 double crochet into a stitch at the end of a row, 
and 5 treble into the stitch at the end of the next row. Repeat from * all round 
the shawl. Make the border rather full round the two points at the ends of the 
shawl. 

2nd Row of Border. — Work 1 double crochet into the stitch between the first 
double crochet and the first treble of the row of the border which has just been 
completed. * Miss 2 stitches, work 7 tr. into the next stitch, miss 2 stitches, 
1 double crochet into next stitch. Repeat from * all the way round. (The clusters 
of 7 trebles will thus be over the centre of the 5 trebles in the first row of the border.) 



118 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

2. BABY'S FIRST VEST. 

Revision of Increasings and Decreasings for the Shaping of the Neck. 

Materials. — Two Bone Knitting-needles — size 11. 2£ oz. of Andalusian Wool. 
1 yd. of narrow Ribbon or Tape. Cost, employing wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 8d. 
(For other suitable wools and their prices, see under Woolcrafi.) 



Fig. 101. Baby's First Vest. 



Instructions. — The work is commenced at the open edge of the right front, 
and continued round until the left front is completed. Cast on 56' stitches, or 
as many as will produce knitting measuring 8 in. in length, unstretched. 
Right Front. 

1st and 2nd Rows. — Knit plain. 

3rd and 4th Rows. — Purl. 

5th and Qth Rows.— Plain. In the fifth row make the first increasing for the 
neck slope thus : Slip the first stitch, make a stitch (First Method, General 
Instructions) ; knit the remainder of the row as usual. 

1th and 8th Rows. — Purl. 

•dthand 10th Rows.— Plain. Increase again in the ninth row, in the same way 
as in the fifth row. It will now be seen that knitting two plain rows and two purl 
rows alternately produces a ribbed effect. Continue this ribbing throughout the 
garment. 

iQ+i? ^iS Ue t0 increase b y making one stitch in every fourth row (i.e., in the 
ldtn, 17th, 21st, 25th, etc.), until there are 68 stitches on the needle, or until the 



STANDARD IV. 119 

knitting measures 9 in. along the row. The straight piece for the shoulder section 
is now commenced. Discontinue the increasings, and proceed with the ribbing 
in the ordinary way until the knitting measures 5£ in. in width from the com- 
mencement. (In the vest shown in Fig. 101, 18 double ribs are worked for the front.) 
Armhole. 

Form this as follows : Cast off 30 stitches (or as many as give a length of 3£ 
in.) at the top of the vest, and knit the remaining 38 stitches of the row. Knit 
back along these stitches, and then cast on 30 new stitches to take the place of 
those cast off, so that the total number of stitches on the needle, in readiness for 
knitting the back, remains unaltered. 
Back. 

Work a perfectly straight piece of knitting 7| in. wide, or consisting of about 
24 double ribs. Cast off to form the armhole as before, and then cast on a 
corresponding number of stitches to take the place of those removed. 
Left Front. 

Work a straight portion equal in width to the straight section of the right 
front. Then commence to decrease for the neck slope as follows : Commencing at 
the top end of a plain row, slip the first stitch, knit 2 tog., knit the remainder of 
the row plain. 

Decrease in the same way at the beginning of one row in every four, until the 
number of stitches on the needle is the same as that at first cast on. The right 
front should now be equal in width to the left front. Cast off, using the second 
method, General Instructions. 
Sleeves. 

Each sleeve is knitted as follows : Cast on 50 stitches, or as many as will pro- 
duce knitting measuring 7 in. in length. Work a piece of ribbing (knit 2 rows, 
and purl 2 rows), 6 in. wide, or consisting of about 20 double ribs. Cast off by the 
second method, General Instructions. 

Making up. — Turn the vest to the wrong side, and join the straight shoulder 
portion of each front to the corresponding part of the back, leaving the middle 
portion of the top of the back to form part of the neck opening. 

Join up each sleeve by means of a seam worked on the wrong side. Then insert 
each sleeve in an armhole, placing the sleeve seam to the under arm seam, and sew 
it in on the wrong side of the garment. 
Crocheted Edging. 

Commence at one end of the bottom of the vest and proceed as follows : — 

Is* Row. — 1 d.c. into the end of the first plain knitted rib, * 1 ch., 1 d.c. into 
the end of the next plain knitted rib ; repeat from * all round the vest until the 
starting-point is reached again. (In working along the edge of each front the 
distance from one d.c. to the next must be judged by the worker, as there will 
be no ribs to serve as a guide.) 

2nd Row. — 1 d.c. into the first chain of the previous row, * 4 chain, 1 d.c. into 
next chain ; repeat from * all round the vest. When the starting-point is reached 
again, break off the wool, draw it through, and fasten it off neatly. Work a 
similar edging round the bottom of each sleeve, drawing in the sleeve slightly, 
while so doing. 
Method of Fastening. 

Lap the left front over the right to produce a double-breasted effect. Attach 
ribbons or tapes (as shown in the photograph) to secure the fronts in position. 



120 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

3. CHILD'S VEST. 

New Pattern of Knitting taught. Larger Number of Stitches on Needle 
employed. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. 3£ oz. of Vest Wool, or other suitable 
4-ply wool. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = Is. OJd. Bone Crochet Hook of 
medium size. 




Fig. 102. Child's Vest. 



STANDARD IV. 121 

Instructions. — The vest described here will fit a child of three years. If coarser 
needles are employed, and the length increased, it can be made to fit a much older 
child. Each half of the vest is knitted separately, and in the following manner : — 

Cast on 72 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting having a width of 
8 \ in. without stretching. The number of stitches selected must be divisible by 4. 
Work 1 in. of ribbing of knit 1 purl 1 for the border of the vest. After the first 
row, always slip the commencing stitch of each row. Change now to the following 
pattern : — 

1st, 2nd, and 3rd Rows. — * Knit 2 purl 2. Repeat from * to the end of the 
row. (For method of counting rows, see General Instructions.) 

4th Row. — Knit plain. Repeat rows 1 to 4 until 12 in. of this pattern has 
been knitted. Now cast off all the stitches except 14 at the end of the row. The 
casting-off should be very loosely done, as the vest is made to slip over the child's 
head. Knit 4£ in. of plain knitting on these 14 stitches to form a shoulder-strap 
for one side of the vest. Cast off. This completes one-half of the vest. 

Making up. — Place one half of the vest upon the other half, so that one shoulder- 
strap is at the right-hand side of the work, and the other at the left. Sew up the 
side seams, starting from the bottom. Leave 2 in. of the ribbed pattern unsewn 
at the top of each side seam, to form part of the armhole. Sew the shoulder- 
straps into position, carrying the strap attached to the front half of the work to 
the back, and the strap from the back to the front. 

The following border may be pat round the neck and armholes to form a 
decorative finish, and to afford a means of drawing the neck up closely after the 
vest has been slipped on : — 

1st Row. — Work 1 treble into a stitch, * 1 chain, miss a stitch, 1 treble into 
the next stitch. Repeat from * right round the neck and armholes, doing trebles 
with 1 chain between in alternate stitches. 

2nd Row. — Make picots all round the first border as follows : 1 double crochet 
into a stitch, * chain 3, go back and make a double crochet into the first of the 
3 chain, miss a stitch, and secure picot by a double crochet into the next stitch. 
Repeat from * all round the border. 

N.B. — If the border seems too full, occasionally miss two stitches instead of 
one. For a simpler crochet border than the above, see under " Doll's Crocheted 
Petticoat," Standard III. Draw up the neck of the vest by running a crocheted 
chain of wool through the holes formed by the border. Attach small pompoms 
to the ends of the chain. Ribbon may be employed for this purpose if preferred. 

4. STRIPED SILK TIE, OR SPORTS TIE IN CLUB COLOURS. 

Revision Exercise in Joining Thread. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 14. Nearly 2 balls of Star Sylko, No. 8, 
in two contrasting shades. The Star Sylko is 2d. per ball, so that one tie can be 
made for a cost of 3fd. 

Instructions. — Long End of Tie. 

With the light shade of silk, cast on 36 stitches, that is, 12 on each of three 
needles, or as many as will produce knitting measuring 3 in. round. The number 
of stitches chosen must be divisible by 2. 

1st Round. — Knit plain. 



122 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

2nd Round.— Knit 1 purl 1 all the way round. Repeat the first and second 
rounds alternately until f in. has been knitted. Finish with a knit 1 purl 1 round. 
Knit 4 stitches of the first needle, break off the thread and join on with the dark 
shade, working about 4 stitches with the double thread. (See General Instructions.) 
Continue the pattern described above in the dark shade, until \ in. of this has 
been knitted. Finish as before with a knit 1 purl 1 round. Knit 4 stitches of 




Fig. 103. Striped Silk Tie. 

the first needle, break off the thread and join on with the light shade. Continue 
to knit alternately in this way £ in. in the light shade and \ in. in the dark, until 
a length of 12 in. has been knitted. 

Neck Portion of Tie. 

Now decrease as follows in each needle for the part which goes round the neck : 
Knit 1, knit 2 tog., knit 1, knit 2 tog., knit 1, knit 2 tog., knit 1, knit 2 tog. There 
will now be 8 stitches on each needle. Knit 16 in. for the neck portion in 
alternate light and dark shades as before. 



STANDARD IV. 123 

Short End of Tie. 

Now increase as follows in each needle for the short end of the tie : Knit 1, 
knit 2 into the next stitch (see General Instructions on Increasings), knit 1, knit 2 
into next stitch, knit 1, knit 2 into next stitch, knit 1, knit 2 into next stitch. 
There will now be 12 stitches on each needle once more. Knit 8 in. for the short 
end of the tie in alternate light and dark shades. Cast off, and sew the open 
ends of the tie neatly together. 

N.B. — The dimensions given above are suitable for a man's tie. Modify the 
lengths given to suit the purpose for which the tie is to be used. 

5. BABY'S BELT. 

Larger Number of Stitches on Three Needles employed. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 12. 1 oz. of Andalusian Wool. Cost of 
wool at 4s. 6d> per lb. = 3£d. (For other varieties of Andalusian Wool, see under 
Woolcraft.) 



Fig. 104. Baby's Belt. 

Instructions. — Cast on 40 stitches on each of three needles, or as many as will 
produce knitting measuring 13 in. round. The number of stitches chosen must be 
divisible by 2. Employ second method of casting on. Work ribbed knitting, 
knit 1 purl 1, for 1J in. for the bottom border of the belt. Change to plain 
knitting, and knit 4 in. Change to ribbed knitting, knit 1 purl 1, and again knit 
1J in. thus, for the top border. Cast off, employing the second method given. 

N. B. — A body-belt for an adult may be knitted in a similar manner, by casting 
on more stitches to commence, and increasing the above measurements [in 
proportion. 



124 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



6. KNITTED SCARF. 

New Pattern of Knitting on Three Needles taught. 

Materials.— Four Bone Needles— size 9. 3£ oz. of Shetland Wool. Cost of 
same at 4s. 8d. per lb. = Is. OJd. (For other qualities of 2-ply wool, see under 
Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 105. Knitted Scarf. 



Instructions. — The following exercise may be made much easier by employing 
wool of a coarser texture than Shetland. If this is done, fewer stitches will be re- 
quired on each needle. The scarf may be knitted with two needles instead of four, in 
which case a scarf 1 J yd. long and 9 in. wide may be knitted from 4| oz. of 4-ply wool. 



STANDARD IV. 



125 



Cast on 126 stitches, that is, 42 on each of three needles, or some suitable num- 
ber which must be divisible exactly by six. The number selected should produce 
knitting measuring about 15 in. round without stretching. 

Rounds 1 to 6. — * Knit 3 purl 3. Repeat from * all the way round. 

Rounds 6 to 12. — * Purl 3 knit 3. Repeat from * all the way round. 

Repeat rounds 1 to 12, reversing the pattern every six rounds, until a scarf 
about \\ yds. long has been knitted. Cast off. 

Making up. — Sew up the ends of the tubular scarf, and make a full fringe at 
each end, as described under General Instructions. If preferred, the ends may 
be drawn up and full tassels suspended, as in the case of the doll's scarf. 



7. SLEEPING SOCK. 

Increasing at the Begin>"ng and Decreasing at the End of the Needle. 
taught. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 8. 1\ oz. of Single Berlin wool or 4-ply 
wool will knit one pair. Cost of one pair, if wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. is employed =. 
9d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see under WooTcraft.) 



€<■-- 



-3"- _>D 



|4 



---3"- 



•V---2.". 



4* 



•-5SB 



7" 




Fig. 106. Foot of Sleeping Sock. 



126 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — Fig. 106 shows the shape of the foot opened out flat, before the 
knitting for the leg is commenced. The sock is joined together up the sole of the 
foot and the back of the leg. 

Foot of Sock. 

Commence at the bottom of the sole along AB as follows : Cast on 42 stitches, 
or as many as will give a width of 7 in. without stretching. Commence immedi- 
ately to increase at each end of the work as follows : knit 1, make a stitch by 




Fig. 107. Sleeping Sock. 

knitting into the front and back of the second stitch (see General Instructions on 
Increasings), and then do plain knitting all along the row. Repeat this row seven 
more times, always slipping the commencing stitch of every row after the first. 
There will now be 50 stitches on the needle, and the strip will slope outwards at 
each end, that is, along BD and AC. 

Now make a stitch at the commencement of alternate rows only. Continue 
to do this until there are 56 stitches on the needle. The outward slope is thus 
continued at one end of the work only, viz., along BD. The short slope at the 
other end, along AC, forms the shape for the heel. 



STANDARD IV. 127 

Slip off now, on to a piece of wool, 24 stitches from the " Heel " end of the 
needle, that is, along MK. This leaves 32 stitches on the needle. Knit 32 rows 
of plain knitting, i.e., about 3 in., on these 32 stitches to form the top of the foot. 

Now cast on 24 more stitches along JL. There will again be 56 stitches on the 
needle. Knit along this row plain, until three stitches only are left at the end. Then 
knit 2 together, knit 1. Knit the next row plain. This decreasing at one end 
will give the slope EF. Continue to decrease in this manner at the ends of alter- 
nate rows, until the stitches are reduced to 50. Now decrease at the end of every 
row, thus continuing the long slope EF, and producing the short slope HG. 
Continue this until there are 42 stitches on the needle. Cast off. 

Leg of Sock. 

Take up on the needle the 24 stitches along MK, which were slipped on to 
the piece of wool. Next take up, on the same needle, the 16 loops along KJ at the 
ends of the 32 rows which form the top of the foot. Lastly, take up the 24 loops 
along JL where the 24 stitches were cast on. This produces 64 stitches altogether, 
and on these the leg is knitted from the foot upwards. 

Join on the wool, and knit six plain rows, slipping the first stitch of each row. 
Change to ribbing of knit 1 purl 1, and do 3 in. of this pattern. Knit eight rows 
of plain knitting. Change again to knit 1 purl 1, and do three more in hes. 
Knit eight more rows of plain knitting, and cast off. 

Making up. — Sew together neatly the seam up the sole of the foot and the 
back of the leg. After the point E has been joined to D, flatten the foot so that 
the seam is under the centre of it (see Fig. 107), before sewing up the seam at the 
toe, which is square-shaped. Turn the work on to the right side. (The portion 
from E to D may be gathered up to form a round toe, if preferred.) 



8. LADY'S BEDROOM SLIPPER. 

New Ornamental Pattern Taught. 

Materials. — A Bone Crochet Hook — medium size. Two Steel Needles — size 12. 
4 oz. Double Fingering or Coat Wool. 1£ yds. ribbon about £ in. wide. A pair 
of light soles. Cost, using wool at 3s. lid. per lb., and soles at Is. 2d. per pair = 
2s. 3d. (For other qualities of thick wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — Cast on 36 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 5 J in. 
wide without stretching. The number of stitches selected must be divisible by 2. 

1st Row. — Plain. 

2nd Row. — Purl. 

3rd Row. — SI. 1,* k. 2 tog., repeat from * until the last stitch is reached ; knit 
the last stitch. 

4th Row. — SI. 1, * pick up the thread between the last and next stitches and 
knit it, k. 1 ; repeat from * until the last two stitches are reached ; knit the last 
two stitches. (See enlarged illustration of stitch in Fig. 109.) These four rows 
really complete the pattern ; but, in order to avoid producing a sloping edge, the 
great disadvantage in a pattern of this kind, a slight variation is made in the last 
row of each alternate pattern. Thus : — 

8th Row. — SI. 1, * k. 1, pick up the thread between the stitches and knit it ; 
repeat from * till the last stitch is reached, k. the last stitch. 







'«& 




S3 

# 








m-'!'"""!^ 


• v. 


:*«-** \ 








^ih ■ fTM^^y?*" 




f&j# 




1 


w 



p. 

0. 

en 

S 
o 
o 

« 
Q 
W 

n 



Q 



00 

o 



o 

to 



STANDARD IV. 129 

12th Row. — Like 4th row. 
16th Row. — Like 8th row. 
20th Row. — Like 4th row. 

Continue working the pattern on this plan until 14 in., or 44 patterns, have 
been knitted. 

For the Toe Piece. 

Cast off the first 12 stitches of the row, i.e., \ of the total width, leaving 24 
stitches on the needle. Continue to work the pattern on these 24 stitches 12 
times more. Cast off. 




Fig. 109. Pattern of Bedroom Slipper Enlarged to Show Details. 

Making up. — (See diagram of Doll's Slipper — Fig. 73.) Sew the inside edge 
BC of the narrow toe-piece to the edge ED at the end of the work where the knit- 
ting was commenced. It will be found that, when the join has been made, about 
1J in. of the wider rectangle will be left over. This portion corresponds with the 
12 stitches cast off on the opposite side of the slipper before knitting the toe-piece. 
The border thus left is turned down as shown in Fig. 108. 

Finishing the edge. — Work picots all round the edge of the turn-down border, 
as follows : d.c. into first stitch of the border, * chain 4, go back into the first 
of the 4 chain and make a d.c. ; secure the picot by a d.c. into the edge a few 
stitches along. Repeat from * all round. 

Drawing wp the slipper. — This pattern produces a series of holes through which 
ribbon may be passed underneath the turn-down border. A bow may be tied 
in front. 

9— (8l5El 



130 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Securing the sole. — Turn the knitted portion on to the wrong side, and sew it 
on to the upper side of the sole so that the point F will form the toe of the shoe 
Then turn it up into its proper position. 

Simpler Pattern for Slipper. 

An easy slipper of the same dimensions may be made by employing the same 
number of stitches, and substituting plain knitting for the pattern described above. 

9. WOOLLEN BONNET FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR. 

New Pattern taught for Border, and " Heel Back " introduced as an 
Exercise' Preparatory to Knitting Socks. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 11. If oz. Single Berlin Wool, or 4-ply 
wool. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 6£d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, 
see Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The bonnet described below will fit a child of about 10 years. 
If coarser needles are used, the same number of stitches may be employed to pro- 
duce a larger bonnet. It will not prove a difficult matter, however, to vary the 
number of stitches and the dimensions to suit the requirements of individual 
children. 

Turned Back Border. 

Cast on 100 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 15 in. unstretched 
Knit 4 plain rows, slipping the first stitch of all rows after the first. 

5th Row. — Slip the first stitch, * make a stitch (employ Second Method, General 
Instructions), knit 2 together. Repeat from * to the end of the row, knitting the last 
stitch plain. Knit 3 plain rows. (For counting of rows, see General Instructions.) 

9th Row. — Work in the same manner as the 5th row. Knit 3 plain rows. 

13th Row. — The same as the 5th row. Knit 3 plain rows. 

17th Row. — The same as the 5th row. Knit 3 plain rows. 

21st Row. — The same as the 5th row. This completes the turned-back border. 

N.B. — A still more ornamental effect may be produced by knitting 1 plain 
row instead of 3 between the openwork rows. 

Part to Fit round Head. 

Knit about 5i in. of plain knitting. (If possible fit the bonnet at this stage 
on the girl for whom it is being made, in order to ascertain the exact length of 
plain knitting required.) 

Turning for Back. 

1st Row of Turning. — Knit 35 stitches, knit 2 together, knit 26 stitches, knit 
2 together, and turn the work completely round without finishing the pin. (If 
the number of stitches on the needle has been reduced, decrease these numbers 
proportionately . ) 

2nd Row of Turning. — Slip the first stitch on to the right-hand needle, knit 
26 stitches, knit 2 together, and again turn the work completely round. Repeat 
the 2nd row of turning, until only 28 stitches remain on the needle. Cast off. 

Making up. — The bonnet shown in the illustration has been decorated with 
the following crochet border : — 

1st Row of Border. — Join on the wool, work 3 chain (to form a tr.), and 1 tr. 
into a stitch, ch. 2, and work 2 more tr. into the same st., * miss 2 st., 2 tr. into I 



STANDARD IV. 



131 



next St., ch. 2, and work 2 more tr. into the same stitch. Repeat from * all round 
the edge of the bonnet. (If the bonnet has been very tightly knitted, it will be 
advisable to miss three stitches before repeating the trebles, or the border will be 
too full.) 

2nd Row of Border. — Make picots all round the first border, as follows : 1 
double crochet into a stitch, * chain 3, go back and make a double crochet into 
the first of the 3 chain, miss a stitch, and secure the picot by a double crochet 
into the next stitch. Repeat from * all round the border. If this seems too full 
miss two stitches occasionally instead of one. 

Ribbon may be run through this border and finished with rosettes at the 
ends, as shown in Fig. 110. This forms a dainty finish to the bonnet. 

N.B. — A simpler edging, such as that described under Doll's Crocheted Petticoat 
(St. Ill), may be substituted, if desired. 




Fig. 110. Woollen Bonnet for Child's Own Wear. 



132 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

10. WOOLLEN HAT KNITTED ON THREE NEEDLES. 

Exercise Preparatory to Knitting the Toe of a Stocking. New Pattern 

TAUGHT. 

Materials. — Four Bone Knitting-needles — size 9. One Button-mould about 1 J in. 
in diameter. 1£ oz. 4-ply knitting wool. Cost, employing wool at 5s. per lb. = 6d. 
(For other qualities of suitable wool, see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 111. Woollen Hat Knitted on Three Needles. 

Instructions. — The brim consists of a double fold. The knitting is commenced 
at the under part of this fold, and finished at the centre of the top of the hat. 
Cast on 132 st. (or as many as will produce knitting measuring 21 in. round), i.e., 
44 on each of three needles. Use the second method given in General Instructions. 

Under-fold of Brim. 

1st Row. — Purl all round. 

2nd Row. — * K. 2, p. 2 ; repeat from * all round. Repeat these two rows 
six times more. This completes the under-fold. 

15th Row. — Purl all round. 

16th Row. — Knit all round. 

Repeat the above two rows again. The four rows just completed form a 
natural fold between the under and upper parts of the brim. Instead of 
working these four rows, the ribbing may be continued unbroken, if preferred. 



STANDARD IV. 133 

Upper Part of Brim. 

Work the same pattern as for under part for 18 rounds. To form another 
natural fold between the brim and the crown, work four more rounds similar 
to the 15th, 16th, 17th, and 18th rounds. 
Crown. 

1st Row. — * K. 1, p. 1 ; repeat from * all round. 

2nd Row. — Plain all round. 

3rd Row. — Plain all round. 

Repeat these three rows until 40 rounds of the crown have been completed. 
Decreasings. 

1st Round. — * K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 16, k. 2 tog., k. 1 ; repeat from * all round. 
There will be six pairs of decreasings in the round. The second decreasing of 
each pair may be done by the " Pulling-over " method. (See General Instructions 
on Decreasings.) 

2nd Round. — Plain. 

3rd Round. — * K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. the pattern for 14 st., k. 2 tog., k. 1 ; repeat 
from * all round. 

4th Round.— r-Plaia. 

5th Round. — * K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 12, k. 2 tog., k. 1 ; repeat from * all round. 

6th Round. — K. 2, p. 1 ; k. 1, p. 1 for 10 st. ; * k. 5 (to cover the section where 
the decreasings are being made), p. 1 ; k. 1, p. 1 for 10 st. ; repeat from * all 
round. 

7th Round.—* K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 10, k. 2 tog., k. 1 ; repeat from * all round. 

8th Round.— Plain. 

It will be obvious by this time that the cap is being narrowed off in six sections, 
and that six ribs of plain knitting separate the sections from one another. Con- 
tinue to narrow off on the same plan until only 4 stitches remain upon each needle. 
Then cast off as follows : Break off the wool leaving an end measuring about 
10 in. in length. Pass each of the stitches in turn on to this wool by means of 
knitting each stitch, and then drawing the end of the wool right through. Take 
the end of wool left through to the wrong side of the cap, and finish it off neatly 
by means of knitting or darning it in. (See General Instructions on Casting-off 
from Three Needles.) 

Covering for Button. 

This is done in plain knitting. Cast on 5 st. Knit 1 row plain. Make a 
stitch at the beginning of each succeeding row until there are 16 st. on the needle. 
(See Fifth Method of Increasing, General Instructions.) Knit 5 rows without further 
increasings. 

Now begin to decrease by knitting two together at the beginning of every row. 
Continue this until only 5 st. remain upon the needle. Cast off. 

Making and Placing on of Button. 

In order to hide the wood completely, a thin covering of cotton-wool may be 
placed over the button-mould before covering it with the knitted circle. Sew 
the button in the centre of the crown to complete the cap. 
To Simplify this Hat. 

It will have been noticed in the above instructions that the chief difficulty 
is that of keeping the pattern going correctly when stitches are being removed 
by decreasings. If the teacher wishes to simplify the work, the cap may be knitted 



134 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

plain after the completion of the brim. The decreasings will then be carried out 
as follows — 

1st Round.—* K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 16, k. 2 tog., k. 1 ; repeat from * all round. 

2nd Round. — Plain. 

3rd Round.—* K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 14, k. 2 tog., k. 1 ; repeat from * all round. 

4th Round. — Plain. 

5th Round.—* K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 12, k. 2 tog., k. 1 ; repeat from * all round. 

6th Round. — Plain. 

Continue the decreasings in this way, i.e., in six gradually narrowing sections, 
until only 4 st. remain on each needle. Cast off. 

n. SMALL GIRL'S CROCHETED STAYS. 

Increasings and Decreasings taught. 

Materials. — Fine Bone Crochet Hook. 4 oz. of No. 4 Knitting Cotton. Cost 
of Stays, if knitting cotton at 2s. per lb. is employed = 6d. 




Fig. 112. Small Girl's Crocheted Stays. 

Instructions. — The little stays described below will fit a child of four or five 
years of age. 

First Half of Back. 

Commence at the centre of the back by making a loose chain about 9 in. in 
length. (The exact depth required should be determined by actual measurement 
of the child for whom the article is intended.) 



STANDARD IV. 135 

1st Row. — Commence with the second chain from the hook, and work 1 double 
crochet into each of the remaining chain stitches along the row. Make 1 chain 
and turn. 

2nd Row. — Taking up the back thread only, work 1 double crochet into each 
stitch of the previous row. Make 1 chain and turn. (N.B. — As it is a rather 
difficult matter to keep the edges at the top and bottom quite level, it is a good 
plan to let the children count their stitches each row, to see that the number 
remains constant.) Repeat the second row until about 4J in. has been worked 
to form one half-back. 

Decreasings for Armhole. 

1st Row. — Turn with no chain, work 1 double crochet into the second stitch 
of the previous row, and 1 double crochet into each remaining stitch along the row. 
Make 1 chain and turn. 

2nd Row. — Work 1 double crochet into each stitch of the previous row. Con- 
tinue to decrease by repeating the first and second rows alternately, until the 
work has been shortened by 2J in., that is, from 9 in. to 6J in. (The depth of 
this downward curve may easily be varied to suit individual wearers.) 

Increasings for Upward Curve of Armhole. 

1st Row. — Make 3 chain, work 1 double crochet into each of the second and 
third chains, and then 1 double crochet into each stitch of the previous row. Make 
1 chain and turn. 

2nd Row. — Work 1 double crochet into each stitch of the previous row. Repeat 
the first and second rows of the increasings alternately, until the work is again 
9 in. in depth. 

Front of Stays. 

For the front, work exactly as described under the first half-back, until a dis- 
tance of about 8£ in. has been worked from the first armhole. (Again determine 
the exact size required by measurement.) 

Second Armhole. 

Work as described under first armhole. 
Second Half of Back. 

Work as described under the first half-back. Cut the thread, and fasten off 
neatly. 

Shoulder-straps. 

Work each shoulder-strap as follows : Make a chain about 7 in. in length. 

1st Row. — Commence with the second chain from the hook, and work 1 double 
crochet into each of the remaining chain stitches along the row. Make 1 chain 
and turn. 

2nd Row. — Work 1 double crochet into each stitch of the previous row, taking 
up the back thread only. Make 1 chain and turn. Repeat the first and second 
rows alternately, until the strap is about 1 in. wide. 

Making up. — Sew the shoulder-straps to the tops of the armholes, as shown 
in the illustration. Sew on tapes for fastening purposes, as described under 
Exercise 3, Standard III, " Baby's Knitted Stays." Press-studs, or loops and 
buttons may be employed, if preferred. 



136 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

12. CROCHETED HAIR-BAND FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR. 

Treble Stitch taught. 

\ "" Materials. — Coarse Steel Crochet Hook — about size 2. £ of a ball of " O-So- 
Silkie," medium size, or fine Knitting Cotton. One ball of " O-So-Silkie " costs 2d., 
and will make three Hair-bands. 




Fig. 113. Crocheted Hair-Band for Child's Own Wear. 

Instructions. — Crochet a loose chain long enough to fit over the top of the 
girl's head. The number of chain made for the hair-band shown in the illustration 
was 60, and the length was 1 1 inches. 

lst t Row. — Work double crochet into each stitch of the chain except the first, 
and do 3 chain to turn. 

2nd Row. — Do 1 treble into the second stitch, * 1 chain, miss a stitch, 1 treble 
into the next stitch. Repeat from * all along the row, doing trebles with 1 chain 
between in alternate stitches. Do 1 chain to turn. 

3rd Row. — Work double crochet into every stitch of the chain. 

4th Row. — The same as the second row. 

5th Row. — The same as the third row. Cut the thread, draw the end through, 
and fasten off securely. 

Making up. — Run ribbon through the holes formed by the pattern, and decorate 
the ends with rosettes. Elastic of the length required to fit under the child's hair 
should be sewn to the ends of the hair-band. 

13. CROCHETED SHAWL (SIMPLE PATTERN). 

Use of Double Crochet in Making Larger Article. 

The instructions for this are given under No. 15 (b) of Standard II Syllabus. 

14. GIRL'S CROCHETED HAT (SIMPLE PATTERN). 
Use of Double Crochet in Making a Larger Article for Girl's Own 
Wear. 

The instructions for this are given under No. 16 (b) of Standard II Syllabus. 

15. GIRL'S CROCHETED BONNET (SIMPLE PATTERN). , 

Use of Treble Stitch in Making a Larger Article for Girl's Own 
Wear. 

The instructions for this are given under No. 15 (b) of Standard III Syllabus. 



STANDARD V. 



i. CHILD'S KNITTED STOLE OR MUFFLER. 

Method of Making Loops taught. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. 3 oz. of Single Berlin Wool, or 4-ply 
wool. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 10£d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool 
seejunder Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 114. Child's Knitted Stole. 
137 



138 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — The stole described below will fit a child of from four to eight 
years. Cast on 24 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 4J inches. 

1st Row.—Knit plain. 

2nd Row. — Insert the needle in the first stitch, bring the wool forward over 
the top of the right-hand needle, and pass it twice round the needle and the first 
two fingers ; then knit the stitch in the ordinary way. This produces the loops 
shown in the illustration. Repeat the process in every stitch along the row. 

3rd, 4th, and 5th Rows. — Knit plain. The third row will prove rather difficult 
knitting, as each stitch is of treble thickness, owing to the method of loop formation 
employed in the second row. 

Repeat the 2nd, 3rd, 4th, and 5th rows in order, until about 30 in. has been 
knitted. The stole should be fitted on the child for whose wear it is intended, 
in order to ascertain the exact length required. Cast off loosely. 

Making up. — Flatten out the knitting, and cut a double layer of cotton-wool 
to fit against the wrong side. Sew this wadding into position at the two ends. Now 
fold the two long edges of the stole together, thus forming a tubular padded muffler, 
with the loops on the outside. Sew neatly together these two long edges, and also 
the two short edges at the ends. Decorate the two ends of the stole with crocheted 
chain and pompoms as shown in the illustration. (See General Instructions.) 

• N. B. — A cheaper muffler or ruffle, involving less work than the above, may be 
made by knitting only a sufficient length to reach round the child's neck. 

Attach ribbons to the ends, so that the ruffle may be fastened by tying these 
ribbons in a bow at one side of the chin. 

A length of knitting of about 14 or 15 in. will be found sufficient. Fit the 
muffler on to the neck of the child for whose wear it is intended, in order to 
ascertain the exact length required. 



2. CHILD'S KNITTED MUFF. 

Second Exercise in Making Loops. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. 2\ oz. of Single Berlin Wool or 4-ply 
wool. Cost of same at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 9d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, 
see Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The muff described below will fit a child of from four to eight 
years. Its finished appearance is shown in Fig. 114(a). 

Cast on 40 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 8 in. Proceed to knit 
in exactly the same pattern as described under the child's stole in the previous 
exercise. Work about 13 in. of this pattern, and cast off very loosely. To deter- 
mine the exact length required, fit the muff on the child for whose wear it is 
intended. 

Making up. — Join the muff into a cylindrical form on the wrong side. Pad 
with cotton -wool, as in the case of the stole, and line with sateen of the same colour 
as the muff. Turn in the raw edges of the lining, and sew it neatly round the 
edges of the muff. Join the lining into a cylindrical form by a nicely-finished 
seain. Make a crocheted chain of suitable length to suspend the muff from the 
child's neck. If this should not be considered strong enough, a chain with double 



STANDARD V. 139 

crochet worked into it will serve the purpose. Decorate with chain and hanging 
pompoms, as shown in the illustration. 




Child's Knitted Muff. 



N.B. — The looped knitting, described in the above two articles, is a useful 
pattern for decorative borders round such articles as Bedroom Slippers, Fancy 
Mats, etc. 



3. BABY'S KNITTED PETTICOAT. 

New Knitting Pattern taught, and New Crocheted Edging introduced 
for Border. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. 3| oz. of,4-ply wool. Cost of same 
at 3s. lid. per lb. = lid. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The petticoat described below will fit a baby of from six months 
to one year old. If coarser needles are used, and the same pattern and number 
of stitches employed, the petticoat can be made to fit a much older child. The 
measurements given would, of course, need to be proportionately increased. 

The pattern described below looks well on either side, though the one selected 
for the right side in the photograph of the complete garment is the more ornamental. 
Fig. 1 16 shows a small section of the reverse side of the knitting. 



140 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 




Fig. 115. Baby's Knitted Petticoat. 

Front Half of Petticoat. 

Cast on 100 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 16 in. wide without 
stretching. If a garment of another size is required, vary the number of stitches 
proportionately. In all cases, however, the number selected should be divisible 
by five. Employ the second method of casting on described under General 
Instructions, as a firm edge is desirable. 

1st Row of Skirt. — * Knit 3 purl 2. Repeat from * all along the row. 

2nd Row of Skirt. — Knit plain. Slip the commencing stitch of every row after 
the first. 

Repeat the first and second rows alternately, until about 9 in. has been knitted. 
(To determine the exact length, measure the skirt against the child for whose wear 
it is intended.) Let the last row of the skirt be a row of plain knitting. Now 



STANDARD V. 141 

narrow for the bodice, by knitting two stitches together all along the row. This 
reduces the stitches to 50. 

1st Row of Bodice. — Knit plain all along the row. 

2nd Row of Bodice. — Slip 1, * make 1 by bringing the wool forward under 
the point of the right-hand needle, and over again to the back (see General Instruc- 
tions on Increasings), knit two together. Repeat from * all along the row, knitting 




Fig. 116. Baby's Knitted Petticoat — Reverse Side of Pattern. 

the last stitch. There will still be 50 stitches on the needle. In all cases the 
number of stitches to which the bodice is reduced must be divisible by four with 
two over. This row forms holes through which a ribbon can be passed to draw 
up the waist. 

3rd Row of Bodice. — Knit plain all along the row. 

4th Row of Bodice. — Knit 2, purl 2 all along the row, finishing with knit 2. 

Repeat the 3rd and 4th rows until about 6 in. has been knitted for the bodice. 
As before, measure the child to ascertain the exact length required. Finish with 



142 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

a row of plain knitting. Now cast off all the stitches except 12 at the end of the 
needle. Keep the casting-off very loose, as the petticoat is made to slip over 
the child's head. Knit 4 in. of plain knitting on these 12 stitches, to form a 
shoulder-strap for one side of the petticoat. Cast off. 

Back Half of Petticoat. 

Knit this in exactly the same way as the front half. 

Making up. — Sew the two halves of the petticoat together in the same way 
as described under " Doll's Petticoat," leaving, however, \\ in. of the side seams 
unsewn at the top for armholes. The neck, sleeves, and bottom of the skirt may 
be decorated by a crocheted edging such as the following : — 

* 1 double crochet into a stitch, miss 1, 4 treble into the next stitch, miss 1. 
Repeat from *. Run ribbon through the neck and waist of the petticoat. 

N.B. — If preferred, the back of the bodice may be divided from the waist- 
line. In this case, employ 52 stitches, 26 on each side, taking care to work the 
shoulder-strap on the correct half to correspond with the front. 

4. BABY'S GAITER. 

Different Method of Decreasing and New Pattern taught. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 8. Two Bone Needles — size 10. 2 oz. 
of Single Berlin Wool or 4-ply Wool will make one pair. Cost of wool at 4s. 6d. 
per lb. = 7d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The gaiter described below will fit a child of about one or two 
years of age. By increasing the length and using coarser needles, the same pattern 
may be varied to produce gaiters for an older child. 

With No. 10 needles cast on 60 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 
7J in. unstretched. The number selected must be divisible by three. 

1st Row. — * Knit 1, purl 2. Repeat from * all along the row. Slip the 
commencing stitch of every row after the first. 

2nd Row. — * Knit 2, purl 1 . Repeat from * to the end of the row. Continue 
to work the 1st and 2nd rows alternately until 27 rows, or about 3 in., have been 
knitted in all. 

28th Row. — Change to No. 8 needles, and commence the following pattern : 
* Purl 2, and then pass over the next stitch without knitting it or taking it from 
the left needle ; knit the following stitch, and draw it right over the stitch that 
was passed by. Now go back to the one that was passed and knit it ; this makes 
an ornamental pattern known as a " Twist." (See enlarged illustration of stitch, 
Fig. 118.) Repeat from * to the end of the row. 

Rows 29, 30, and 31. — * Purl 2 knit 2. Repeat from * all along row. The 
last four rows form one block of the pattern. Repeat this block eight more times, 
thus producing n'.ne blocks. 

Rows 64, 65, and 66.— Like rows 28, 29, and 30. 

67th Row. — Purl 2 knit 2, * purl 2 knit 2 together. Repeat from * till four 
stitches remain, purl 2 knit 2. 



STANDARD V. 143 

' : 68th Row. — Purl 2, * make the twist as described under 28th row, purl 1. 
Repeat from * till the last six stitches are reached. Then make the twist, purl 2, 
make the twist. 

69th Row.— Purl 2, knit 2, purl 2, * knit 1, purl 2, and repeat from * ; knit 2 
at the end. 




Fig. 117. Baby's Gaiter. 

70th Row. — Purl 2/ * knit 2, purl 1 ; repeat from * till the last six stitches are 
reached. Then knit 2, purl 2, knit 2. 

71s/ Row. — Purl 2, knit 2, purl 2, * knit 1, purl 2 ; repeat from * and knit 2 
at the end. 

72nd Row. — The same as the 68th row. Change back now to No. 10 needles, 
and knit 18 plain rows. 



144 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



91st Row. — Cast off 12 stitches, and knit to the end. 
92nd Row. — Like the 91st row. 

Now continue plain knitting, but decrease as follows in every third row : 
Knit 1, knit 2 together, knit plain along the row till three stitches are left at the end. 




Fig. 118. Details of Producing Twist in Baby's Gaiter. 



3mit 2 together, knit 1. Continue to narrow thus in every third row, till only 
12 stitches remain on the needle. Then knit 1 plain row, and cast off. 

Making up. — Sew up the seam at the back of the gaiter on the wrong side. 
Add a strip of elastic of the required length to go under the instep. Elastic about 

j- in. wide should be used and can be obtained at 3d. a yard. 



5. KNITTED HUG-ME-TIGHT OR BOLERO. 

INew Knitting Pattern introduced, and more difficult Crochet Border. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 7. 4 oz. of 4-ply wool. Cost of wool 
at 4s. 6d. per lb. = Is. ljd. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The pattern described below looks well on either side, though 
the one selected for the right side in the photograph is the more ornamental. The 



STANDARD V. 



145 



appearance of the reverse side of the knitting is similar to the reverse side of the 
" Baby's Knitted Coat " described under Exercise 2, Standard VII. The following 
is a very simple method of making a Hug-Me-Tight, as it is formed from a 
straight-edged piece of knitting shaped like the letter T. 



42i" 



13-4 



13 i 



c 8t" 



At— -8V- }B 

Fig. 119. Knitted Hug-Me-Tight. 



First Half Front. 

Commencing at the end AB, cast on 48 stitches, or as many as will give a width 
of 8 J in. unstretched. The number of stitches selected should be divisible by two. 

1st Row. — Knit 1 purl 1. Repeat this all along the row. 

2nd Row. — Knit plain,, slipping the first stitch. Repeat the 1st and 2nd rows 
alternately, until 90 rows, or a sufficient number to produce a length of 14£ in., 
have been knitted. Throughout the knitting slip the commencing stitch of every 
row after the first. 

10— (815B) 



146 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Back of Hug-Me-Tight. 

Cast on 48 additional stitches at the end of a row, that is, along CD. This 
will produce 96 stitches on the needle. Continue the pattern as before, until 84 
rows have been knitted, or a sufficient number to produce a length of 13J in. 

Second Half Front. 

Cast off 48 stitches along EF, that is, at the same end of the needle as the 48 
additional stitches were cast on. Knit 90 more rows on the remaining 48 stitches, 
or a sufficient number to measure 14J in., as in the case of the first half-front. 
Cast off. 

Making up. — Fold down the point B to meet the point C, and A to meet D ; 
sew up the resulting under-arm seam on the wrong side. Similarly fold G to F, 
and H to E, and sew up the second under-arm seam. It will be seen that the 
long side HA is now curved round to form the back of the neck and the curved 
fronts {cf. Frontispiece). Work the following crochet border completely round the 
edge of the Hug-Me-Tight, and also round the armholes : — 

1st Row. — Join on the wool, work 3 chain (to form a treble) and 1 treble into 
a stitch, then 1 chain and 2 more treble into the same stitch. * Miss 2 stitches, 
2 trebles into next stitch, 1 chain, and 2 more trebles into the same stitch. Repeat 
from *. 

2nd Row. — Work single stitch to reach the hole formed by the 1 chain in the 
centre of the first group of trebles. Work 5 trebles into this hole, and then proceed 
to work 5 trebles into each succeeding hole right round the border. 



6(A). RULES FOR KNITTING AND TURNING OF HEELS. 

Preliminary Instructions to be used for Purposes of Reference when 
Knitting any Socks or Stockings subsequently described. 

Number of Stitches on the Needle. 

This should be as nearly as possible half the total number of stitches which 
were on the needles before commencing the heel. There must be a seam stitch, 
and an even number of stitches on each side of it. Thus, if there were 72 stitches 
altogether on the three needles of the leg, 37 stitches should be taken for the heel, 
the one in excess of half the total being used to provide a seam-stitch. 

Number of Rows. 

Work the same number as there are stitches on the heel needle. 

Method of Knitting. 

1st Row. — Slip the first stitch ; knit the remainder with the exception of the 
seam-stitch which is purled. 

2nd Row. — Turn the knitting round, and work back along the heel-needle 
thus : Slip the first stitch purl-wise ; purl the remainder with the exception of 
the seam-stitch which is knitted. 

Repeat these two rows alternately throughout the length of the heel. 



STANDARD V. 147 

Methods of Turning. — Gusset Heel. 

Discontinue the seam-stitch. 

1st Row. — Purl two more stitches than the number each side the seam-stitch, 
(e.g., in the case of the heel above mentioned, where the number each side the 
seam was 18, purl 20), p. 2 tog., p. 1. 

2nd Row. — Turn the work completely round, and work back thus : s. 1, k. 4 
k. 2 tog., k. 1. 

3rd Row. — Turn the work round again ; s. 1, p. 5, p. 2 tog., p. 1. 

4th Row. — Turn; s. 1, k. 6, k. 2 tog., k. 1. 

5th Row. — Turn; s. 1, p. 7, p. 2 tog., p. 1. 

6th Row. — Turn; s. 1, k. 8, k. 2 tog., k. 1. 

Continue thus, increasing by one every row the number of stitches before taking 
two together. Decrease the total number of stitches on the heel in this way until 
there are no more stitches to be removed from the ends of the needle. The 
number of stitches remaining will always be three more than the number of stitches 
on each side of the seam of the heel. 

Dutch Heel. 

1st Row. — P. to the seam-stitch, k. the seam-stitch, p. 3 after the seam stitch, 1 
p. 2 tog. 

2nd Row. — Turn ; s. 1, k. 3, purl the seam-stitch, k. 3, k. 2 tog. 
3rd Row. — Turn ; s. 1, p. 3, k. the seam stitch, p. 3, p. 2 tog. 
Repeat the above two rows alternately until all the stitches are removed from 
the ends of the needle. There will now be 9 stitches left. 

Methods of Thickening Heels. 

There are two methods of knitting heels of greater durability in wear than 
those already described. 

First Method. 

1st Row. — Slip 1, and knit 1 alternately until the seam-stitch is reached ; purl 
the seam-stitch, and then knit 1, slip 1, alternately to the end. The last stitch 
of the row must, however, always be knitted, not slipped. 

2nd Row. — Slip the first stitch purl- wise ; purl the remainder with the excep- 
tion of the seam-stitch, which is knitted. Repeat these two rows alternately 
throughout the working of the heel. 

Second Method. 

Work the heel in the ordinary manner, but knit in with the wool an extra 
thread of silk or cotton. " O-So-Silkie, " or D.M.C. " Coton Perle" of medium 
thickness, is suitable for providing this extra thread. It must, of course, be of 
the same colour as the wool which is being employed. 



1 In the case of a large-sized sock or stocking it is advisable to k. 4 or p. 4 past the seam-stitch 
at every turn. There will then be 11 stitches left on the needle at the end. 



148 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



6(B). CHILD'S SOCKS. 

Knitting and Turning of Heel, and Decreasings for Foot and Toe taught 

Materials. — 2£ oz. of 4-ply Knitting Wool will make one pair. Four Steel 
Needles — size 14. Cost, using wool at 3s. lid. per lb. = 7£d. per pair. (For 
other qualities of suitable wool, see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 120. Child's Sock. 



Instructions. — The socks described below will fit a child of about four years of age. 

Cast on 60 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting which will measure 
about 5J in. round. The exact width should be determined by measuring round 
the child's leg. 

For Welt. 

Knit 30 rounds or 2 \ in. of ribbing, k. 1, p. 1. 

For Leg. 

Use plain knitting with the exception of one purled stitch in every round for 
the seam stitch. Knit 60 rounds or 5 in. of this. 



STANDARD V. 149 

For Heel. 

Place 15 stitches (i.e., J of the total number round leg) each side of the seam- 
stitch, and knit as described under Dutch Heel. There will be nine stitches left on 
the heel after turning, and the last row worked will be a knitted row. In readiness 
for the foot pick up 15 loops along the side of the heel immediately adjoining the 
wool coming from this row of 9 stitches, and knit into each loop in turn. Knit 
along the stitches left on the front needle. Lastly, pick up 15 loops along the 
other side of the heel, and knit into these. 
Arrangement of Stitches for Foot. 

One side needle. — 5 st. from heel + 15 st. taken up along the side of the 
heel + 5 st. from instep needle. 

The other side needle. — 4 st. from heel + 15 st. taken up along the side of 
the heel + 6 st. from instep needle. 

Instep needle. — The 18 st. remaining. 
Decreasings of Foot. 

1st Round. — Plain. 

2nd Round. — Instep needle. Plain. 

First side needle. — K. 5, k. 2 tog., k. plain to the end. 

Second side needle. — K. till only 7 st. remain on the needle. Then k. 2 tog., k. 5. 

Repeat the above two rounds alternately, until only 18 st. remain on each 
side needle. 

Straight Portion of Foot. 

28 rounds, or 2J- in. of plain knitting. 
Decreasings for Toe. 

1st Round. — First needle. K. 1, k. 2 tog., and then k. till only 3 st. remain 
on the needle, k. 2 tog., k. 1. Repeat this process on each of the remaining needles. 

2nd, 3rd, . and 4th Rounds. — Plain. 

Repeat the above four rounds once more. 

9th Round. — Like 1st round of decreasings. 

10th and 11th Rounds. — Plain. 

Repeat the above three rounds once more. 

15th Round. — Like 1st round of decreasings. 

16th Round. — -Plain. 

Repeat the above two rounds twice more. There will now be four stitches on 
each needle. Break off the wool. Cast off by knitting each of the stitches in 
turn on to the end of the wool left. Take this end through to the wrong side 
of the sock, and finish it off neatly. (See General Instructions on Casting-off from 
three needles.) 

7. SHAWL OR WRAP OF SHETLAND WOOL. 
Open-work Pattern and Border, suitable for Knitting Shawls, taught. 

Materials. — 4 J oz. of White Shetland Wool. Two Bone Needles — size 11. Cost, 
using wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = Is. 3£d. (For other varieties of wool suitable for 
shawls, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — If worked in Shetland Wool, or other 2-ply varieties, the following 
pattern produces a very dainty wrap. If a thicker wrap is required the same pattern 
may be carried out in 4-ply wool on No. 8 needles. In that case fewer stitches 
will be needed on the needle than those given in the following instructions. 

Cast on 198 stitches, or as many as will produce knitting 25 in. wide. (In all 
cases the number of stitches must be divisible by 7 with 2 over.) 



150 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



Border. 

1st Row. — Purl. 

2nd Row. — Plain. 

3rd Row. — Purl. 

4th Row. — Plain. 

Hth Row.—S. 1, * k. 2 tog., k. 1, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, k. 1, k. 2 tog. ; repeat from 
* till only one stitch remains on the needle ; knit the last stitch. 

6th Row.—PutL 

Repeat the last two rows alternately nine times more. This completes the border. 
To separate the border from the remainder of the shawl : Purl 1 row, knit 1 row 
purl 1 row, knit 1 row. 




Fig. 121. Shawl or Wrap of Shetland Wool. 



For the Remainder of the Shawl. 

1st Row. — Like 5th row of border. 

2nd Row. — Purl. 

3rd Row. — Plain. 

4th Row. — Purl. 

Repeat the above four rows until the shawl is of the desired length. A suitable 
length is 50 in. when finished. Then work rows before the completing border as 
follows : Purl 1 row, knit 1 row, purl 1 row, knit 1 row. 



STANDARD V. 151 

Border. 

1st Row. — Like 5th row of previous border. 

'2nd Row. — Plain. 

Repeat the last two rows alternately nine times more. Then purl 1 row, knit 1 
row, purl 1 row, knit 1 row. Cast off very loosely using the second method. 

8. GIRL'S CROCHETED PETTICOAT (SIMPLE PATTERN). 
Revision of Double Crochet, and of Treble Stitch, in Larger Article for 
Girl's Own Wear. 
The instructions for this are given under No. 16 (b), Standard III Syllabus. 




Fig. 122; Crocheted Woollen Scarf. 



9. CROCHETED SCARF. 

Harder Exercise in the Use of Double Crochet and Trebles. 

Materials. — Bone Crochet Hook of medium size. 3 oz. of Single Berlin or 4-ply 
wool. Cost of wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 10£d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, 
see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — Make a chain of the length required for the scarf (200 chain was 
the number employed for that shown in Fig. 122), a scarf 50 in. in length. 



152 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



1st Row. — Work double crochet into each stitch of the chain except the first, 
and do 4 chain to turn. 

2nd Row. — Do 1 treble into the second stitch, * 1 chain, miss a stitch, 1 treble 
into the next stitch. Repeat from * all along the row, working trebles, with 1 
chain between in alternate stitches. Do 1 chain to turn. 

3rd Row. — Work double crochet into every stitch of the chain. Repeat the 
2nd and 3rd rows alternately 13 times. Twenty-seven rows will have been worked 
in all. Cut the wool, draw the end through, and fasten off securely. This will 
produce a scarf about 9 in. wide, which may be lengthened by making a longer 
chain to commence, or widened by increasing the number of rows worked. Finish 
off the ends of the scarf by adding a full fringe. (See General Instructions.) 

io. VESTETTE, OR SHAPED NECK WRAP, IN CROCHET. 

Treble Stitch employed in Article of more Difficult Shape. 

Materials. — A small Bone Crochet Hook. 1 oz. of 4-ply wool. 3 press-studs. 
Cost, employing wool at 5s. per lb. = 4d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see 
under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 123. Vestette, or Shaped Neck Wrap, in Crochet. 



STANDARD V. 153 

Instructions. — The wrap is commenced at the top of the collar, and worked 
downwards. 

Collar. 

Make a chain 14 in. in length, or 14£ in. in the case of a large neck. 

1st Row. — Turn with 3 chain, and work 1 treble into every stitch of the chain. 

2nd Row. — Turn with 3 chain, and work 1 treble into the hole between the 
last 2 trebles of the previous row, * 1 tr. into the next hole between trebles ; repeat 
from * into every hole along the row. (There should be exactly the same number 
of trebles in this as in the previous row.) Continue to work rows like the second row 
until the strip for the collar is from 2 to 2\ in. wide, according to the requirements 
of the intended wearer. 

Front or Chest Portion. 

Work with single stitch for 3 in. along the lower edge of the collar, in order 
to reach the correct point to commence the working of the front, then also allow 
for 3 in. to be left at the other end of the collar. The part left in between for 
the working of the chest portion should measure from 8 to 9 in. Count how 
many trebles there are in this middle part. It is necessary to know this in order 
to decide how many d.c.'s are to be worked in each row in order to shape the neck 
curve. 

1st Row. — Work trebles along the first quarter of the portion allotted for the 
front ; next work d.c.'s along the middle half of this portion ; then work trebles 
along the remaining quarter. 

(In the case of the vestette shown in Fig. 123. the number of stitches to be 
worked for the chest portion was found to be 44. Therefore the first row was 
worked thus: 11 tr., 22 d.c, 11 tr.) 

2nd Row. — In this row the sloping off of the front is commenced by starting 
thus : Work with single stitch into the first hole between trebles. Then work 
3 chain to serve as the first treble ; then 1 tr. into the next hole. 

By this means the number of stitches in the row will become one less than in 
the previous row. Every row for the next 4 in. must be commenced in this way, 
so that there is a decrease of one stitch per row. 

In this second row, work two more trebles each side the centre than in the 
first row, and a correspondingly less number of d.c.'s to form the centre. 

(In the case of the vestette shown in Fig. 123, the second row was worked thus : 
13 tr., 17 d.c, 13 tr.) 

3rd Row. — Again work two more trebles on each side the centre than in the 
previous row, and less d.c.'s in the centre. Continue to lessen the number of d.c.'s 
in this way for each succeeding row, until only 4 d.c.'s remain to be worked in 
the centre. 

After this, work the rows entirely in trebles. When 4 in. has been com- 
pleted from the bottom of the collar downwards, and the front portion is about 
5£ in. across the width, discontinue the slope, by commencing each row as was 
done in the case of the collar. Continue in this way until the chest portion 
measures 1\ in. down the centre of the front, when the vestette will be completed. 



154 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

ii. CROCHETED SILK NECK- WRAP. 

Practice in the Method of Joining Thread in Crochet. 

Materials. — A Steel Crochet Hook — size 2. One ball coloured Star Sylko or 
D.M.C.— No. 8. Seven balls white Star Sylko or D.M.C.— No. 8. Cost = Is. 4d 



Fig. 124. Crocheted Silk Neck-wrap. 



Instructions. — The quantities given above will make a wrap of which the length, 
exclusive of fringe, is 45 in. Make 80 chain, or a length of 74 in. 

1st Row. — Turn with 1 chain, and work 1 d.c. into every stitch of the chain. 

2nd Row. — Like first row, working 1 d.c. into every stitch of the previous row. 

3rd Row. — Turn with 3 chain, and work 1 treble into every stitch of the second 
row. Repeat these three rows four times more. 

Now join on the coloured Sylko. (See General Instructions.) It is always 
advisable to make the join in a row of d.c.'s, as it will be less conspicuous than 
if made in a row of trebles. Work a stripe about half an inch wide in the coloured 
Sylko, still continuing the pattern as at first described. 

Cut off the coloured Sylko, join on the white again, and work a stripe about 
three-quarters of an inch wide. 

Again cut off the white, and join on the coloured Sylko, and work another 
stripe to correspond in width with the first coloured one. (The number and width 
of the coloured stripes may be varied to suit individual tastes.) 

Again commence to work with the white Sylko, and continue with this until 
about 40 in. in all has been worked. Now work coloured stripes to correspond 



STANDARD V. 155 

with those at the beginning of the wrap, and finish with a white stripe to match 
the commencement. 

N.B. — Great care must be taken throughout to keep the rows of exactly equal 
length, or a ragged edge will be produced. Frequent counting is highly advisable 
to see that the right number of stitches is still being worked on each row. 
Fringing. 

Finish the ends of the wrap with a fringe as described in General Instructions, 
but let each knot of the fringing consist of six strands of Sylko. The finished 
fringe should be 2 J in. deep. 

12. CROCHETED TIE, FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR. 

More Difficult Pattern taught involving Trebles. 

Materials. — Steel Crochet Hook — size 2. Two balls " Coton Perle " D.M.C. — 
size 5, or " O-So-Silkie," medium size, at 2d. per ball. Cost of one tie = 4d. 




Fig. 125. Crocheted Tie. 

Instructions — Long End of Tie. 
Commence with a chain of 20. 

1st Row. — * Miss 3, work 2 treble into the fourth stitch, chain 2, work 1 treble 
into the same stitch. Repeat from * to the end of the row and turn with 5 chain. 



1S6 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

(Small holes will have been formed by the 2 chain between the trebles, into which 
the pattern of the next row will be worked.) 

2nd Row. — * Work 2 tr. into the first hole, chain 2, and work 1 tr. into the 
same hole. Repeat from * into each of the four remaining holes along the row. 
There will thus be five repetitions of the pattern. Turn with 5 chain. Repeat 
this second row, until 15 in. has been worked. The tie is now reduced in width 
as follows, to form the narrow part for neck. 

Narrow Portion for Neck. 

1st Row. — Repeat the pattern four times, that is, into each of the first four 
holes. Into the fifth hole work 2 tr. only, and then turn with 5 chain. 

2nd Row. — Repeat the pattern three times, that is, into the first three holes. 
Into the fourth hole work 2 tr. only, and turn with 5 ch. 

3rd Row. — Repeat the pattern three times, as there are now only three holes. 
Turn with 5 chain. Repeat this third row (in which there are only three repeti- 
tions of the pattern), until 13 in. of the narrower part has been worked. Now 
widen for the other end of the tie in the following manner. 

Short End of Tie. 

1st Row. — Work the pattern into each of the three holes, and also into the 
5 ch. at the end, thus producing four patterns. Turn with 5 ch. 

2nd Row. — Work the pattern into each of the four holes, and also into the 
5 ch. at the end, thus producing five patterns. Turn with 5 ch. 

3rd Row. — Work the pattern into each of the five holes. Turn with 5 ch. 
Continue to repeat this third row, until 13 in. more has been worked for the 
second end of the tie. Fasten off neatly. 

N.B. — If the rows are turned without 5 chain, a less picoted edge is formed, 
rendering the tie more suitable for a boy. The regulation proportions of a tie 
for a boy or a man are : — 

Long end, 12 in. ; narrow portion for neck, 16 in. (rather less for a boy) ; short 
end, 8 in. 



STANDARD VI. 



i (A). STOCKING FOR CHILD'S OWN WEAR. 

Decreasings in Leg taught. 

Materials. — Four Steel Knitting-needles — size' 14. 6 oz. Black 4-ply wool for 
one pair. Cost, using wool at 3s. 9d. per lb. = Is. 5d. per pair. (For prices of 
other suitable 4-ply wools, see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 126. Stocking for Child's Own Wear. 
157 



158 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — Cast on 84 stitches. (For variation of width, see under 1 (b) of 
this Standard.) 

Welt. 

Work 25 rounds, or 2 in., of ribbing, knit 1 purl 1. 

Portion of Leg before Decreasings. 

Use plain knitting with the exception of one purled stitch in every round for 
the seam-stitch. Knit 8 in. of this. 

Decreasings of Leg. 

1st Round. — Knit until 3 st. remain before the seam-stitch, s. 1, k. 1, draw 
the s. stitch over the k. stitch, k. 1, p. the seam-stitch, k. 1, k. 2 tog., k. remainder 
of round. (A detailed description of each of these methods of decreasing is given 
in General Instructions.) 

Next 8 Rounds. — Plain. (Retain seam-stitch throughout the leg.) 

Repeat the above nine rounds three times more. 

37th Round. — Decrease again in the same way as in 1st round. 

Next 6 Rounds. — Plain. 

Repeat the above seven rounds twice more. 

58th Round. — Like 1st round. (The total length occupied by the decreasings 
is 5 in.) 

Portion between Decreasings and Heel. 

Five inches of plain knitting. 
Heel. 

Place 17 stitches each side the seam-stitch, and knit as described under Gusset 
Heel. (See 6 (a), St. V.) There will be 20 st. left on the heel after turning. In 
readiness for the foot take up 17 loops from one side of the heel, and 16 from the 
other side, and knit them. (For full description of this process, see under 6 (b), 
St. V.) 

Arrangement of Stitches for Foot. 

One side needle. — 10 st. from heel + 17 st. taken up along the side of the 
heel + 6 st. from instep needle. 

The other side needle. — 10 st. from heel + 16 st. taken up at the side of the 
heel + 7 st. from instep needle. 

Front or instep needle. — The 22 remaining st. 

Decreasings of Foot. 

The aim of working these is to decrease the number of stitches on each side 
needle to 22, the same number as for instep needle. 

1st Round. — Plain. 

2nd Round. — Front needle. Plain. 

1st side needle. K. 6, k. 2 tog., k. plain to the end. 

2nd side needle. K. plain till only 8 st. remain, k. 2 tog., k. 6. 

Repeat the above two rounds alternately until only 22 st. remain on each side 
needle. 

Straight Portion of Foot. 
3J or 3£ in. of plain knitting. 



STANDARD VI. t 159 

Decreasings of Toe. 

1st Round. — 1st needle. K. 1, k. 2 tog., knit till only 3 st. remain on the needle, 
k. 2 tog., k. 1. Repeat this process on each of the remaining needles. (In the 
case of the first decreasing on each needle, the Pulling-over method may be used. 
See General Instructions.) 

2nd, 3rd, and 4th Rounds. — Plain. 

Repeat the above four rounds twice more. 

13th Round. — Like 1st round. 

14th and 15th Rounds. — Plain. 

Repeat the above three rounds twice more. 

22nd Round. — Like 1st round. 

23rd Round. Plain. 

Repeat the above two rounds twice more. There will now be four stitches on 
each needle. Break off the wool. Cast off the remaining stitches by knitting 
them in turn on to the loose end left, and drawing it through each one. Finish 
the end off neatly on the wrong side of the stocking. (See General Instructions on 
Casting-off.) 

i (B). ADAPTATION OF FOREGOING INSTRUCTIONS TO 
PRODUCE STOCKINGS OF DIFFERENT SIZES. 

1. Determination of the Number of Stitches to Produce the Correct 

Widths for the Various Parts of the Stocking. 

Measure the girth of the leg at a distance of 5 or 6 in. above the knee. (This 
distance, however, may be varied according to the length of the stocking above 
the knee preferred by the individual wearer.) Ascertain -the number of stitches 
per inch produced by the knitter. Multiply this number by the number of inches in 
the girth measurement. Divide the resulting number by 3 to obtain the number 
of stitches per needle. Number of stitches after the leg narrowings should be $ 
of the number at first cast on, and this is also the number of stitches required on the 
needles of the foot after the decreasings following the heel. 

2. Scale of Lengths. 

The following rules enable the knitter to make a stocking to fit a wearer of 
any height, provided that suitable measurements have been taken. 

(1) The Leg. — First measure the intended wearer's height from the ankle to 
the bend of the knee. The total length of the leg of the stocking before com- 
mencing the heel must be 1 J times this measurement. (Thus, in the girl's stocking 
just described, the wearer's leg measurement was 13£ in., and the length knitted 
before the heel was 20 in.) 

The length of the portion before the decreasings of the leg should be about £ of 
the total length of the stocking-leg. (See' Fig. 127.) 

The decreasings themselves should occupy about £ of the total length. 

The portion between the decreasings and the heel will then occupy \ of the total 
length. (In the case of the girl's stocking for which the instructions are given, it 
will be noticed that 10 in., including the welt, was knitted before commencing 
the decreasings, that the decreasings themselves were 5 in. in length, and that 
the portion between the decreasings and the heel was also 5 in. long.) 



160 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



(2) The Heel. — The proportions for heels have already been given in the special 
article on the subject. {See Standard V Syllabus.) 

(3) The Foot. — The measurement of the foot should be taken from the back 
of the heel, along the side of the foot to the toe. The length, from the line where 




Fig. 127. Diagram Showing Proportions of Stocking. 

the side-stitches of the foot were taken up to the decreasings for the toe, should 
be § of this measurement. (See Fig. 127.) 

The decreasings should occupy £ of the same measurement. The remaining J is 
given by the depth of the heel itself. 



i(c). RE- WELTING AND RE-FOOTING OF SOCKS OR 
STOCKINGS. 

1. RE- WELTING. 

When the tops of socks or stockings have been worn into holes or torn by use 
of a suspender, or in any other way, the whole welt can be replaced in the following 
manner : — 



STANDARD VI. 161 

(a) For Socks or Stockings of Plain Knitting with Ribbed Welts. — Cut the 
welt completely off immediately below the point where the ribbing for the welt 
ceased. Pick out all loose bits of wool with a needle, and it will be found that 
the plain knitting will unravel quite readily. Unravel just so much as is neces- 
sary to leave a clear row of stitches for picking up completely round the work. 
If care was taken to cut in a perfectly straight line when removing the welt, only 
one or two rounds need be undone. Knit with the long end of the unravelled 
wool until about 6 in. of this remains, and then join on the new wool. (See 
General Instructions.) 

Work plain knitting for the same number of rounds which it was found neces- 
sary to unravel before picking up the stitches ; then commence to do ribbed knitting 
for the welt. Continue this for the required length, and then cast off loosely, 
employing the second method described under General Instructions. 

(b) For Ribbed Socks or Stockings, with a Welt of different Ribbing. — 
Cut off the welt as before, taking great care to cut in a straight line. Pick out 
the loose ends until the stitches are quite clear and one end of wool only remains. 
This will be found a more difficult process than in the case of the plain knitting, 
as, owing to the ribbing, the work will not unravel directly, but the wool has to 
be drawn out a stitch at a time till the work is quite level. 

Owing to the position of the stitches it will be found that it is not possible 
to continue the ribbed pattern of the leg without the evidence of a slight break 
in the continuity of the pattern. It is best, therefore, to commence immediately 
to knit the ribbing for the welt, joining on the new wool as soon as the unravelled 
end has been knitted up. 

Another plan is to knit two or three plain rounds before commencing the 
ribbing for the welt. 

2. Re-footing. 

It is frequently found that the heels and soles of socks and stockings have 
become very much worn, while the legs still remain in quite good condition. The 
most economical plan, in such a case, is to replace completely the old heel and 
foot by knitting new ones on to the old leg. 

Obtain wool as nearly as possible of the same texture and thickness as that 
of the leg on to which the new heel and foot are to be knitted. Proceed as 
follows : — 

Cut off the heel and foot immediately above the worn-out portion, which will 
frequently be found to extend for 1 or 2 in. up the leg. Pick out the loose bits 
of wool and unravel the work till a clear row of stitches is obtained, as described 
under re-welting. Then pick them up and proceed to knit round with the end of 
the unravelled wool, the ribbing or plain knitting of the leg being continued as 
the case may require, until about 6 in. of the old wool remains. Join on the new 
wool and continue to knit in rounds until the leg has been made up to its original 
length. 

Then proceed to knit a new heel and foot to match the old heel and foot exactly. 
Instructions for so doing are given under the various socks and stockings described 
in Standards V, VI, and VII. 

II— (815B) 



162 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 
2. GENTLEMAN'S RIBBED SOCK. 



Decreasings in Ribbed Knitting taught. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 13. Mixture wool — 6 oz. for the pair. 
Cost, using wool at 3s. lid. per lb. = Is. 6d. (For other qualities of fancy mixtures, 
see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 128. Gentleman's Ribbed Sock. 

Instructions. — Cast on 84 stitches. 
"Welt. 

Work 50 rounds, or 4 in., of ribbing, k. 1, p. 1. 
Portion between the Welt and Decreasings. 

Change the rib to k. 3, p. 1 . Knit 30 rounds, or 2 J in., of this before commencing 
decreasings. 



STANDARD VI. 163 

Decreasings of Leg. 

1st Round. — K. 3, p. 1, for 12 st. ; k. 2 tog., k. 1, purl the next stitch, which 
is now to be treated as the seam-stitch, k. 1, k. 2 tog., p. 1 ; then k. 3, p. 1, for the 
remainder of the round. 

2nd Round. — K. 3, p. 1, for 12 st. ; then k. 2, p. 1 twice, the rib being lessened 
by the decreasing ; k. 3, p. 1, for the remainder of the round. 

Next 7 Rounds. — Like 2nd round. 

10th Round. — Work the rib in the usual way until 3 stitches remain before 
the seam-stitch ; k. 2 tog., k. 1, p. the seam-stitch, k. 1, k. 2 tog. ; then k. 3, p. 1, 
for the remainder of the round. 

11th Round. — K. 3, p. 1, for 8 stitches; k. 5, p. 1 twice; k. 3, p. 1, for the 
remainder of the round. 

Next 7 Rounds. — Like 11th round. 

19th Round. — Work the rib until 3 st. remain before the seam-stitch ; k. 2 tog., 
k. 1, p. the seam-stitch, k. 1, k. 2 tog. ; k. 2, p. 1 ; then k. 3, p. 1, for the remainder 
of the round. 

20ih Round. — K. 3, p. 1, for 8 stitches ; then k. 4, p. 1 twice ; then k. 3, p. 1, 
for the remainder of the round. 

Next 7 Rounds. — Like 20th round. 

28th Round. — Work the rib until 3 st. before the seam-stitch ; k. 2 tog., k. 1, 
p. the seam-stitch, k. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 1, p. 1 ; then k. 3, p. 1, for the remainder 
of the round. This round completes the decreasings, the rib is now restored, and 
the method of working is again k. 3, p. 1 all round. (In all the above decreasings, 
the " Pulling-over " method described in General Instructions may be used before 
the seam-stitch.) 

Portion between Decreasings and Heel. 
Knit 25 rounds or 2 in. of ribbing. 

Heel. 

Place 18 st. on each side of the seam-stitch, and knit as described under " Gusset 
Heel." (See 6 (a), St.V.) There will be 21 stitches left on the heel needle after 
the turning. In preparation for the foot, take up 17 loops on one side of the heel 
and 18 loops from the other, and knit them. (For full description of this process 
see under 6 (b), St. V.) 

Arrangement of Stitches for Foot. 

One side needle. — 10 st. from heel + 17 st. taken up along side of 
heel + 2 st. from beginning of instep needle. 

Instep needle. — The 37 st. which now remain upon it. 

The other side needle. — 11 st. from heel + 18 st. taken up along side of heel, 

Decreasings of Foot. 

1st Round. — Front or instep needle. In the case of this needle the ribbing 
will be continued right up to the toe. The first and last stitches will be purled. 
On the two side needles plain knitting will be worked. 

2nd Round. — On the front needle the rib is continued. First side needle — 
knit 1, k. 2 tog., k. to the end. Second side needle — k. till only 3 st. remain, k. 
2 tog., k. 1. 

Repeat the above two rounds alternately until only 19 st. remain on each of 
the side needles, and 75 st. on all three needles together. (In the case of each 
decreasing on the first side needle the Pulling-over method may be used.) 



164 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Straight Portion of Foot. 

Work the whole of this with the front needle ribbed, and the two side needles 
plain. This portion should consist of 66 rounds, or measure 5£ in. 
Decreasings at Toe. 

Take 6 st. from each end of the instep needle and place them on the side needles, 
so that there are now 25 st. on each needle. The rib is now discontinued. 
Carry out the decreasings and casting-off exactly as described in the Stocking 
which forms the preceding exercise to this, but work the 22nd and 23rd rounds 
four times over instead of three ; this will reduce the number of stitches to 5 on 
each needle. (The length of the completed foot should be about 10J in.) 

Method of Adapting the above Instructions to fit a Larger or Smaller 

Foot. 

The instructions given are for a man's sock of medium size. If a sock of large 
size is required, the width may be increased by the addition of 4 st., or any multiple 
of 4, in the case of the leg, and 3 st. or a multiple of 3 in the case of the foot. Thus, 
88, 92, or even 96 st. may be employed at the commencement of the leg, and 78, 
81, or 84 for the straight portion of the foot. 

The length may be increased by knitting a larger number of rounds before and 
after the decreasings in the leg (so that the proper proportion may still be 
preserved), and also more rounds for the straight portion of the foot. 

The method of apportioning the stitches for the heel has already been given 
in " Rules for Knitting and Turning Heels." (See under 6 (a), Stan. V.) In the 
case of a smaller sock than that described being required, the process given above 
should be reversed. 

3. CHILD'S KNITTED JERSEY. 

Formation of Shoulder Flap, and Knitting-in of Button-holes taught. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 9. Three Steel Needles — size 12. 3 oz. 
4-ply wool. Five small pearl or bone buttons. Cost, using wool at 5s. per lb., = 
Is. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — This jersey will fit a child of from one to two years of age, but, if 
coarser wool and needles are used, and the same number of stitches employed, it 
will fit a much older child. 
Back. 

The work is commenced at the bottom of the back along the line AB in Fig. 
131. With the thicker needles cast on 66 St., or as many as will produce un- 
stretched knitting 7J in. wide ; knit 18 rows of ribbing, k. 1, p. 1 ; slip the first 
stitch in every row after the first. 

19th Row. — Plain. 

20th Row. — Purl. This row commences the pattern. 

21st Row. — * K. 1, p. 1 ; repeat from * all along the row. 

22nd Row. — Like last row. 23rd Row. — Plain. 

24th Row. — Like 21st row. 25th Row. — Like last row. This completes pattern. 

Repeat the last six rows 15 times more until total length of knitting is 134 in 

116th Row.—K. 17 (see space CD in Fig. 130) ; cast off 32 (see line DE) to 
form the back of the neck opening ; knit 10 (see line EF), and leave the remaining 
stitches unknitted (see space FJ). On these same 10 stitches (line EF) knit the. 



STANDARD VI. 165 

pattern for nine rows, and then cast off. (The flap EFGH thus formed will have 
buttons affixed, and, as indicated by the dotted line, will lap under the button- 
holes which will be knitted into the portion opposite.) Join on a fresh piece of 
wool, and knit the last seven stitches of the 1 16th row. 




Fig. 129. Child's Knitted Jersey. 

Front. 

With Row. — Purl 7, cast on 42 (to form front of shoulder and neck opening) ; 
purl the last 17 st. There are again 66 st. on the needle. 

\\8th Row. — Like 21st row. 

\\9th Row. — Like last row. 

\20th Row. — K. 49, k. 2 tog., m. 2 (wool over twice), k. 2 tog., k. 2, k. 2 tog., 
m. 2, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end. 

121s* Row. — Like 21st row. Two button-holes have now been formed on the 
left shoulder, to fit on to the flap EFGH before mentioned. {See Fig. 130.) 
Knit the pattern until there are 16 repetitions from the neck, or until the length 



166 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



of the front is equal to the length of the back exclusive of the ribbed edge. Now 
knit one purl row and one plain row before the border. 

Knit 18 rows of ribbing to correspond with those at the commencement of 
the back, and the line KL of the diagram will be reached. Cast off by the second 
method given in General Instructions. 




44" 



Fig. 130. Child's Jersey. 
(Collar not shown.) 
The Sleeves. 

Hold the right side of the work towards you, and count 20 loops or measure 
4 in. downwards from the centre row of the right shoulder. Commence, at this 
point, M, to pick up and knit stitches, making one after every two picked up, until 



STANDARD VI. 167 

you reach the 20th loop down the front, that is, the point N. There should be 
in all 60 stitches. 

1st Row. — Purl. 

2nd Row. — Like 21st row of back. 

3yd Row. — Like last row. 

4th Row. — SI. 1, k. 2 tog., and then k. till only 3 st. remain, k. 2 tog., k. 1. 

5th Row. — * P. 1, k. 1 ; repeat from * all along row. 

6th Row. — Like last row. 

1th Row. — S. 1 purl fashion, p. 2 tog., p. till only 3 st. remain, p. 2 tog., p. 1. 

Repeat the last six rows till only 46 stitches remain on the needle, or until the 
sleeve is 5 in. wide. Continue to knit the pattern without further decreasings 
until the 61st row is completed, or until the sleeve-length is 7 in. Take the No. 12 
needles and knit 20 rows of ribbing like those at the beginning, and the line OP 
of diagram will be reached ; cast off as before. Knit the second sleeve in the 
same way. 

The Collar. 

With the steel needles, pick up and knit stitches along the neck opening, be- 
ginning at the 10th cast-on stitch at the front of the left shoulder (i.e., just beyond 
the second button-hole). Continue picking up stitches until the end of the flap, 
point H, is reached. In all, there should be 76 st. A third needle is convenient 
for knitting the first few rows. 

1st Row. — * K. 1, p. 1 ; repeat from * along the row. 

2nd Row. — SI. 1, p. 1, k. 2 tog., m. 2, k. 2. tog., * k. 1, p. 1 ; repeat from *. 

Next 7 Rows. — Continue the ribbing, k. 1, p. 1. Repeat the last eight rows 
once more. There are now two button-holes made in the collar. 

18th Row. — Like the 2nd row to form a third button-hole. 

Next 4 Rows. — Continue the ribbing, k. 1, p. 1. Cast off as before. 

Sew up the sleeve and side-seams ; secure the end of the shoulder-flap in its 
place ; then sew on five buttons to correspond with the button-holes. 

4. BABY'S KNITTED GLOVE. 

Method of Increasing for Thumb taught. This is a Helpful Exercise 
Preparatory to the Teaching of Knitted Glove for Girl's Own Wear. 

Materials. — 1 yd. narrow ribbon. Four Steel Needles — size 16. 1 oz. White 
Andalusian Wool for one pair. Cost, using wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 4Jd. (For 
other varieties of suitable wool and their prices, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — It should be noted that the instructions given below are for a 
glove knitted in an ornamental stitch. If the teacher desires, the work can be very 
much simplified for the girls by having the gloves worked in plain knitting, while 
carrying out the instructions in the matter of dimensions of glove, method of 
increasing for thumb, knitting of thumb, etc. The glove described will fit a child 
of from 1J to 2 years. 

Cast on 54 stitches, or as many as will produce unstretched knitting measuring 
4 in. round. 
Wrist. 

Work 36 rounds of k. 1, p. 2 ribbing. 



168 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Hand. 

1st Round. — Plain. 

2nd Round. — * K. 2 tog., m. 2 by passing the wool over the needle twice, k. 2 
tog. ; repeat from * until 2 stitches of the round remain ; then m. 1, k. 2 tog. 

3rd Round. — Plain. There should still be 54 st. all round. The row of holes 
made is to be used for running the ribbon through for the wrist. 




Fig. 131. Baby's Knitted Glove. 



4th Round. — * K. 2 tog. ; repeat from * all round. 

5th Round. — * P. 1, take up the thread between the last and next stitches, and 
purl in it ; repeat from * all round. 

6th, 7th, and 8th Rdunds. — Plain. 

The above five rounds form the pattern. Work two more rounds of the pattern 
before commencing the widenings for the thumb. 

11th Round. — Make a stitch by taking up and knitting the thread between the 



STANDARD VI. 169 

last stitch knitted, and the first stitch of the new round ; then knit the remainder 
plain. 

12th Round. — Plain. There are now 55 stitches. 

13th Round. — Make 1 and purl it, k. 1, make 1 and purl it; knit remainder 
of round. 

14th Round. — P. 1, k. 1, p. 1 ; continue as for pattern for the remainder of 
the round, i.e., knitting two together continuously. 

15th ' ound. — P. 1, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, p. 1. Continue the pattern for the remainder 
of the round, i.e., * p. 1, take up the thread between the stitches, and purl it. 
Repeat from *. 

16th Round. — P. 1, k. 3, p. 1 ; knit remainder plain as in pattern. 

17th Round. — P. 1, m. 1, k. 3, m. 1, p. 1 ; knit remainder plain. 

18th Round. — P. 1, k. 5, p. 1 ; knit remainder plain. Continue to increase in 
this way in alternate rows until there are 13 stitches between the 2 purl stitches. 
(The pattern is to be continued except for the part between the purl stitches.) 

Next 10 Rounds. — Without increasing. 

For the Thumb. 

Take 1 plain stitch before the first purl stitch, both purl stitches, the 13 stitches 
between the purl stitches, with 1 plain stitch beyond, and arrange these 17 stitches 
on three needles. Before joining into a ring, cast on 6 new stitches. (All the 
stitches left for the hand, 52 in number, should be placed on a separate piece of 
wool while the thumb is knitted.) 

1st Round of Thumb. — Plain. 

2nd Round. — Plain. 

3rd Round. — Beginning with the newly cast on stitches, k. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 2 
tog., knit plain for the remainder of the round. 

Next 20 Rounds. — Plain. 

24th Round. — Knit 2 together repeatedly all round, break off the wool, and 
then cast off the 1 1 stitches left, by passing them on to the loose end of the wool. 
Take this end through to the wrong side, and finish neatly. 

For the Part of the Hand above the Thumb. 
Place the stitches as follows : — 

1st needle — 2 st. before the thumb, 6 new st. from the part inside the thumb, 
and 14 more stitches. 
2nd needle — 18 st. 
3rd needle — 18 st. 
1st Round.— Plain. 

2nd Round. — K. 2, k. 2 tog., k. 2, k. 2 tog., knit plain for the remainder of 
the round. 

3rd Round. — K. 2, k. 2 tog., k. 2 tog., knit plain for the remainder of the round. 
This leaves 54 st. all round. 

Continue without further decreasings until seven patterns have been completed 
past the thumb. 

For Decreasings at Top of Glove. 
Arrange the stitches as follows : — 
27 on the front needle, 
14 on the second needle, 
13 on the third needle. 



170 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



1st Round. — 1st needle. K. 1, k. 2 tog., knit plain until 3 st. remain on the 
needle, k. 2 tog., k. 1. 

2nd needle. — K. 1, k. 2 tog. ; knit plain to the end. 

3rd needle. — Knit plain until only 3 st. remain on the needle, k. 2 tog., k. 1. 

2nd Round. — Plain. Repeat the above two rounds six times more. 

Cast off as follows : Turn the glove wrong side out. Put the stitches from 
the second and third needles all together on one needle. Knit two stitches together, 
one from each needle ; knit another two in the same manner ; pass the first result- 
ing stitch over the second ; knit two together as before ; repeat the process of passing 
the previous stitch over ; continue in this way until only one stitch remains on 
the needle. Break off the wool, draw it through, and fasten it off neatly. For 
alternative method of casting-off, see General Instructions on Grafting. The 
glove above described is for the right hand. For the left hand make the following 
alteration : — 

Arrange the stitches for the part above the thumb thus : 1st needle. — Start 
at the 3rd stitch after the thumb, and use 18 stitches. 

2nd needle. — The next 18 stitches. 

3rd needle. — 14 stitches, then 6 stitches made along the inside of the thumb, 
then 2 stitches after the thumb. 

The decreasings described in the case of the right-hand glove will commence 
at the newly-made stitches. 

5. KNITTED LACE EDGING. 

New Knitting Pattern taught for Woollen or Cotton Lace Edgings. 
Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 17. Crochet Cotton, No. 30. 




Knitted Lace Edging. 



STANDARD VI. 171 

Instructions. — The following knitted edging, and the crocheted lace edgings given 
under the Standard VII Syllabus, are useful for trimming underclothing made by the 
girls in needlework lessons, and also for trimming fancy and household articles. 

Cast on 10 stitches. 

1st Row. — Plain. 

2nd Row. — Knit 3, make 1 and knit 2 together three times in succession, 
make 1, knit 1. 

3rd Row. — Knit plain, slipping the last stitch. 

4th Row.—K. 4, m. 1 and k. 2 tog. three times in succession, m. 1, k. 1. 

5th Row. — The same as 3rd row. 

6th Row. — K. 5, m. 1 and k. 2 tog. three times in succession, m. 1, k. 1. 

7th Row. — The same as 3rd row. 

8th Row. — K. 6, m. 1 and k. 2 tog. three times in succession, m. 1, k. 1. 

9th Row. — The same as 3rd row. 

10th Row. — K. 7, m. 1 and k. 2 tog. three times in succession, m. 1, k. 1. 
11th Row. — The same as 3rd row. 

12th Row. — K. 8, m. 1 and k. 2 tog. three times in succession, m. 1, k. 1. 
13th Row. — Cast off 6 stitches, and finish knitting along the needle. It 
will be found that again there are 10 stitches to deal with. Repeat the pattern, 
commencing from the 2nd row, as many times as required. 

6. BABY'S CROCHETED BONNET. 

More Difficult Variations of Pattern introduced. 

Materials. — Bone Crochet Hook of medium size. 1 oz. of Single Berlin Wool 
or 4-ply wool. Cost of wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 3£d. (For other qualities of 
4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 133. Baby's Crocheted Bonnet. 



172 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — The bonnet described below will fit a baby of six months. It 
can be increased in size by working a longer chain to commence with and increasing 
the number of rounds before the turned-back border. Commence by making a 
loose chain of 16, or as many as will measure 3 in. in length. 

1st Round, — Work double crochet along these 16 chain, putting 2 stitches 
into the last or corner stitch ; then continue to work d.c. along the other side of 
the chain, putting 2 stitches into the last stitch as before. 

N.B. — Take up the back strands of the stitches in the first two rounds. 

2nd Round. — -Repeat the 1st round again, once more putting 2 d.c. into each 
corner stitch. A little oblong piece is thus formed, round which succeeding rows 
are worked. 

3rd Round. — Work 3 tr. into the 1st stitch, * miss 2 stitches, and work 3 tr. 
into the next stitch. Repeat from " till one stitch before the corner is reached. 
When rounding the corner, instead of missing 2 stitches between the sets of trebles, 
miss 1 stitch only twice over. Proceed then as before, missing 2 stitches between 
the trebles, until the second corner is reached. Treat this in the same way as 
the first corner. 

Repeat this 3rd round ten more times, making 1 1 rounds of the trebles. This 
completes the part of the bonnet that fits the head. Proceed now with the 
turned-back border. 

14th Row. — Proceed as in the 3rd round, until two sets of trebles past the 
corner have been worked ; in passing the corner this time, however, miss 2 stitches 
between the trebles, and not 1 as in preceding rounds. 

15th Row. — Now, instead of working on, turn with 3 chain, and work back 
along the 14th row, until two sets of trebles past the second corner have been 
worked. Again miss 2 stitches between the trebles, and not 1 in passing the 
corner. 

16th Row. — Again turn with 3 chain, and work as described under the 14th row. 

Repeat this row three times more. Now work the following edging completely 
round the turned-back border, and round the bottom of the bonnet where it fits 
to the neck : — 

Work 1 d.c. into a stitch, * chain 3, go back and make a d.c. into the first of 
the 3 ch., miss a stitch, and secure this picot by a d.c. into the next stitch. Repeat 
from * all round the bonnet, working, however, into one strand only of the edge 
of the bonnet. 

Now repeat this border of picots a second time round the bonnet, working 
this time into the opposite strand of the edge. 

A double row of edging is thus formed, one row of which turns up, and one down. 
{See Fig. 133.) Attach ribbon strings to the bonnet, and also place rosettes of 
ribbon on the ends of the turned-back border. 

7. CROCHETED WOOLLEN HAT, WITH BRIM. 

Double Treble Stitch taught. 

Materials. — Bone Crochet Hook — medium size. 1J ot. of Single Berlin Wool, 
or 4-ply wool. Cost of hat, employing wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = 5Jd. (For other 
qualities of 4-ply wool, see Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The hat described below will fit a child seven or eight years old. 
It can be quite easily decreased or increased in size by decreasing or increasing 
the number of rounds. 



STANDARD VI. 173 

Crown of Hat. 

Commence at the centre of the top of the crown with 4 chain ; and join then to 
form a ring. 




Fig. 134. Crocheted Woollen Hat. 

1st Round. — Work 2 d.c. into each stitch. (For convenience in determining 
the beginning of each new round, adopt the following plan : Mark the beginning 




Fig. 135. Crocheted Woollen Hat, with Brim. 
(Marking beginning of rows.) 

of the work with a firmly-fastened cotton of contrasting colour, and darn it in 
as shown in Fig. 135 to mark the beginning of each successive row.) 



174 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

2nd Round. — Work 2 tr. into each stitch. 

3rd Round. — Work 2 double tr. into each stitch. 

4th Round. — * Work 2 d. tr. into the 1st stitch, and 1 d. tr. into the 2nd stitch. 
Repeat from * all the way round, doing 2 d. tr. and 1 d. tr. alternately. 

5th Round. — * Work 2 d. tr. in 1st stitch, 1 d. tr. in 2nd stitch, and 1 d. tr. in 
3rd stitch. Repeat from *, putting 2 d. tr. into every 3rd stitch and 1 d. tr. into 
the other stitches. 

6th Round. — * Work 2 d. tr. into the 1st stitch, and 1 d. tr. into each of the 
2nd, 3rd, and 4th stitches. Repeat from * all the way round. 

7th Round. — Work 1 d. tr. into every stitch all the way round. 

8th and 9th Rounds. — Like the 7th round. 
10th Round. — Like the 6th round. 
11th Round. — Like the 7th round. 

12th Round. — Work 1 d.c. into each stitch all the way round. 
13th and 14th Rounds. — Like the 12th round. These three rows finish the 
crown of the hat. 
Brim of Hat. 

1st Round. — Like the 6th round of the crown. 

2nd Round. — * Work 2 d. tr. into 1st stitch, and 1 d. tr. into each of the 2nd, 
3rd, 4th, and 5th stitches, Repeat from * all the way round. 

3rd Round. — Like 7th round of crown. 

4th Round. — * Work 2 tr. into the 1st stitch, and 1 tr. into each of the 2nd, 
3rd, 4th, and 5th stitches. Repeat from * all round. 

5th, 6th, and 1th Rounds. — Like the 12th, 13th, and 14th rounds of crown. 
This completes the brim, which should turn up slightly at the edges all the way 
round, as shown in the illustration. 



8. CROCHETED PETTICOAT. 

New Pattern taught. 

Materials. — A Bone Crochet Hook — medium size. 3\ oz. 4-ply knitting wool. 
Cost, using wool at 4s. 6d. per lb. = Is. 0|d. (For other suitable wools and their 
costs, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The photograph and description are of a petticoat fitting a child 
of about two years, but, by varying the length, the same method may be employed 
in making a petticoat for a child of any size. 

Work 120 chain, or as many as will measure 30 in., the number selected to be 
divisible by 10. 

1st Row. — 1 tr. into every stitch of the chain. (The back of the stitch is 
always to be taken up in order to produce a ridged appearance on the right side 
of the petticoat.) 

N. B. — Break off the wool at the end of this and the next six rows, i.e., until 
the bottom of the placket is reached. This enables all the working to be done 
on the right side of the petticoat. When the placket has been completed, the rows 
may be worked continuously round the petticoat. 

2nd Row. — 1 tr. into each of the first 9 tr., * miss 1 tr., 1 tr. into each of 
the next 9 tr., repeat from * all along the row. 



176 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

3rd Row. — Miss 1 st., * 1 tr. into each of the next 3 st., 3 tr. into next or 
middle stitch of group ; 1 tr. into each of the next 3 St., miss 2 St., repeat from * 
all along the row. 

Next 5 Rows. — Like last row. Do not break off the wool on completing the 
last row of the five. 

9th Row.— In this row bring the two ends of the work together, and work 
straight round the petticoat. Miss 1 st., * 1 tr. on each of the next 3 st., 5 tr. 
into the next or middle stitch of the group, 1 tr. on each of the next 3 St., miss 
2 st. Repeat from * all round. The number of trebles in each group has now 
been increased to 11. 

10th Row. — Miss 1 St., * 1 tr. into each of the next 4 st., 3 tr. into the middle 
stitch of the group, 1 tr. into each of the next 4 st., miss 2 st. Repeat from * 
all round. 

Next 5 Rows. — Like 10th row. 

16th Row. — A further increase is made in this row. Miss 1 st., * 1 tr. into each 
of the next 4 St., 5 tr. into the middle stitch of the group, 1 tr. into each of the 
next 4 st., miss 2 st. Repeat from * all round. 



9. CROCHETED CURTAIN HOLDER. 

New Pattern taught. 

Materials. — Fine Bone Crochet Hook. Four balls of Silkateen (standard size) 
will make two Holders. The cost of the Silkateen at 2d. per ball will be 8d. 
" O-So-Silkie " and D.M.C. " Coton Perle " are equally suitable materials at the 
same price. 

Instructions. — Make a chain of the required length. 108 chain, giving a length 
of 22 in., was the number employed for the curtain holder shown in Fig. 138. If the 
length is varied, make a number of chain that is divisible by 6. 

1st Row. — Chain 1, and work d.c. all along the chain. 

2nd Row. — Chain 3 (to count as a treble), work 4 tr. into the first stitch, miss 2, 
1 d,c. into next stitch, * miss 2, 5 tr. into next stitch, miss 2, 1 d.c. into next stitch. 
Repeat from * to the end of the row, finishing with a d.c. 

Repeat the 2nd row three more times. At the end of the 5th row, make 30 
chain for one of the end loops, carry this chain across the end of the curtain -holder, 
and fix it at the opposite corner by a d.c. Now begin to work picots along the 
length of the first edge of the holder as follows : * Ch. 3, go back and make a d.c. 
into the first of the 3 ch., miss 2 stitches and secure picot by a d.c. into the following 
stitch. Repeat from * all along the first edge of the holder. 

Now chain 30 for the second loop, and carry this chain across the other end of 
the holder, securing it at the opposite corner by a d.c. 

Now continue the picots down the second long side of the holder. On reaching 
the end, work d.c. all round the 30 chain that were made for the 1st loop. Cut 
the thread and fasten the end in neatly. 

Lastly, join the cotton on again at the end of the second loop of 30 chain, and 
work d.c. all round this. Cut the thread, and finish off the work. 




Fig. 137. Crocheted Curtain Holder. 



13— (815B) 



178 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 
io. CROCHETED SHAWL. 



New Pattern taught, and more Difficult Border introduced. 

Materials. — Bone Crochet Hook — large size. 10 oz. of 4-ply wool. Cost, 
using wool at 5s. per lb. = 3s. 1 £d. (For other varieties of suitable wool and their 
prices, see under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 138. Crocheted Shawl. 



Instructions. — Chain 180. (This will produce a shawl about 30 in. square. If 
the size is different, select a suitable number of stitches divisible by four.) 

1st Row. — Take 2 treble into the fourth stitch of the chain, * miss 2 stitches, 
1 d.c. into next stitch of chain, make 3 chain, 2 treble into next stitch ; repeat 
from * all along the row. 

2nd Row. — Turn, work 3 chain, 2 treble into the first stitch, * then miss the 2 
treble and 3 chain, and work a double crochet on the double crochet in the last 
row ; work 3 chain, 2 treble into next stitch ; repeat from * all along the row. 

Repeat the above row until a square is formed. Fig. 140 shows the details of 
pattern and border on a larger scale. 

The Border. 

1st Row. — One treble into first stitch of side, * 2 chain, miss about 3 stitches 
along the edge of the shawl, 1 treble into the next stitch ; repeat from * all round 
the shawl. 

. 2nd Row.— Work the following group into the .bar of 2 chain left between 
the first 2 trebles : 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble, 2 chain, 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble. 



STANDARD VI. 179 

* Miss the bar of 2 chain between the next 2 trebles, work another group of trebles 
like the one described into the next bar of 2 chain ; repeat from * all round. 

3rd flow.— Work along with single stitch to the 2 chain in the middle of the 
first group of trebles. Into the 2 chain work the following group ; 1 treble, 1 chain, 
1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble, 2 chain, 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble (6 
trebles in all). Repeat this group into the middle bar of each of the groups of 
the previous row 




Fig. 139. Corner of Shawl Enlarged to show Details of Pattern. 

4th Row. — Work along with single stitch to the 2 chain in the middle of the first 
group of trebles in the previous row. Into the 2 chain work the following group : 
1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble, 2 chain, 1 treble, 
1 chain, 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble, 1 chain, 1 treble (8 trebles in all). Repeat 
this group into the middle bars of all the groups in the previous row. When the 
last group has been worked, draw the wool through the first treble of the first group 
in order to finish off the corner, and fasten off the end left. 

If it is desired to make the shawl more ornamental, ribbon about £ in. wide 
may be run through the open-work portion between the shawl proper and the 
border. 

The size of the shawl may be increased by commencing with a larger number 
■of chain, and also by using coarser wool and a larger hook. 



STANDARD VII. 



i (A). GLOVE FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR. 

To Teach the Method of Knitting Fingers. 

Materials.— Four needles— size 16. 2 oz. 4-ply Knitting Wool^ for one pair. 
Cost, using wool at 3s. lid. per lb. = 6d. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, see 
under Woolcraft.) 




Fig. 140. Glove for Girl's Own Wear. 
180 



STANDARD VII, - .., 181 

Instructions. — Cast on 60 stitches, or as many as will produce the width required 
for the individual wearer. The number selected must be divisible by 2. 

For the Wrist. 

Knit 60 rounds of ribbing, k. 1, p. 1. 

For the Hand. 

1st Round. — * K. 6, m. 1 (by knitting in the back of the last knitted stitch) ; 
repeat from * 9 times. There are now 70 stitches. 

Next 12 Rounds. — Plain. 

14th Round. — This round commences the increasings for the thumb. K. 30, 
take up the thread between the last and next stitches and purl it, k. 40. (This 
is the plan to be followed for the left-hand glove. For the right-hand glove, k. 40, 
m. 1 and purl it, k. 30.) 

15th Round.— K. 30, p. 1, k. 40. 

16th Round. — K. 30, p: 1, m. 1 (by knitting into the front and back of the 
next stitch), p. 1, k. 39. 

17th Round. — K. 30, p. 1, k. 1, p. 1, k. 39. 

18th Round. — K, 30, p. 1, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, p. 1, k. 39. 

19th Round.—K. 30, p, 1, k. 3, p. 1, k. 39. 

20th Round. — K. 30, p. 1, m. 1, k. 3, m. 1, p. 1, k. 39. 

2\st Round. — K. 30, p. 1, k. 5, p. 1, k. 39. 

22nd Round.- — K. 30, p. 1, m. 1, k. 5, m. 1, p. 1. k. 39. Continue to increase 
in this way in alternate rows, until there are 13 plain stitches between the two 
purled stitches. 

Next 12 Rounds. — Knit these without increasing. They should brjng the knitr 
ting up to the root of the thumb. In the case of a girl with a small hand less 
than 12 rounds may be required. The number of rounds desirable should be 
ascertained by measuring the glove, while in progress, against the hand of the 
child for whom it is intended. 

For the Thumb. 

Take 2 plain stitches before the first purled stitch, both purled stitches, the 
13 plain stitches in between, with 2 plain stitches beyond and arrange these 19 
st. on three needles. Before joining into a ring cast on 8 new stitches. (The 
number of cast-on stitches may be reduced in the case of a child with a slender 
band.) Slip the hand stitches on to a piece of wool until the thumb is completed. 

1st Round. Plain. 

2nd Round. — Plain. 

3rd Round. — Beginning with the newly cast-on stitches, k. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 2, 
k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end of the round. 

Next 2 Rounds.— Plain. 

6th Round. — K. 1, k, 2 tog., k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end of the round. This 
leaves 23 stitches all round. 

Next. 32 Rounds. — Plain. (More or less than 32 rounds may be required. 
Ascertain this by measurement against, the thumb of the girl for whom the glove 
is intended. The knitting should reach just to the tip of the thumb before the 
decreasings are made.) 

39th Round. — K. 2 tog. 11 times. 

40th Round. — Plain. Break off the wool, and pass the remaining stitches on to 
the loose end left. Take this wool through to the wrong side, and finish neatly, 



182 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

For the Part between the Thumb and Fingers. 

Pick up 11 new stitches from the part inside the thumb, and arrange all the 
stitches on three needles again. (If the number of stitches cast on inside the 
thumb was reduced, pick up a correspondingly smaller number of stitches here.) 
Commence each round with the new stitches. 

1st Round. — K. 2 tog., k. 7, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end of the round. 

2nd Round. — K. 2 tog., k. 5, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end. 

3rd Round. — K. 2 tog., k. 3, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end. 

4th Round. — K. 2 tog., k. 1, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end. 

5th Round. — S. 1, k. 2 tog., pass the slipped stitch over ; knit plain to the 
end. 

Next 20 Rounds. — Knit plain. (Again the number of rounds may be varied 
to fit a smaller or a larger hand. The number should be determined by taking 
the measurement from the root of the thumb to that of the first finger, and" making 
the knitting above the thumb measure this length.) 

Arrangement of Stitches for Fingers. 

The 19 stitches in the centre are to be used for the first finger. (In finding 
the centre of the round, regard the round as beginning in the same position as 
the first round at the wrist.) 

For the second finger the next 9 stitches at the back, and the next 9 at the 
front of the glove are used. Pass these 18 stitches on to a piece of wool. 

For the third finger pass 9 stitches from the back, and 8 stitches from the front 
of the glove on to another piece of wool. 

For the fourth finger pass the remaining 12 stitches on to a piece of wool. 

First Finger. 

Arrange the 19 stitches on three needles, but before joining, cast on 7 new 
stitches. Commence each round with the new stitches. 

1st Round. — K. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 1, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end of the round. 

2nd Round. — Plain. 

3rd Round. — K. 1, s. 1, k. 2 tog., pass the slipped stitch over, knit plain to the 
end. 

Next 40 Rounds. — Plain. (Vary this number of rounds to suit the length of 
the finger.) Then finish as in thumb. 

Second Finger. 

Take up 7 new stitches from the side of the first finger, then the 9 stitches 
from the back of the glove ; next cast on 7 new stitches ,- then take up the 9 
stitches from the front of the glove. Arrange them all on three needles. 

1st Round. — Commencing with the cast-on stitches, k. 1, k. 2 tog. k 1 k 2 
tog., k. 11, k. 2 tog., k. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 10. 

2nd Round. — Plain. 

3rd Round. — K. 1, s. 1, k. 2 tog., pass the slipped stitch over, k. 11, s. 1, k. 2 
tog., pass the slipped stitch over, k. 10. 

Next 42 Rounds. — Plain. (Vary this number of rounds to fit the finger.) 
Finish as in thumb. 



STANDARD VII. 183 

Third Finger. 

Pick up 7 new stitches from the side of the second finger ; then the 9 stitches 
from the back of the glove ; then cast on 7 new stitches, and take up the 8 stitches 
from the front of the glove. Arrange them all on three needles. Narrow off the 
two sets of 7 stitches in the same way as described for the second finger, until 
23 stitches remain. 

Next 40 Rounds. — Plain. (Vary this number of rounds to fit the finger.) 
Finish as in thumb. 

Fourth Finger, 

Pick up 8 new stitches from the inside of the third finger. Arrange these 
and the 12 remaining stitches on three needles. Knit 35 rounds, or so, plain, 
and finish as in thumb. 

i(b). MITTEN FOR GIRL'S OWN WEAR, 
Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 16. 1J oz. of 4-ply wool for one pair. 
Cost, using wool at 3s. 1 Id. per lb. = 4 £d. 

Instructions. — Knit as described above under " Glove " with the following 
variations : — 

(1) When half the thumb has been knitted, change to ribbing of k. 1, p. 1. 
Do J in. of this, and cast off. (Second method, General Instructions.) 

(2) In knitting the part between the thumb and fingers, continue as in the 
glove until within. £ in. of the base of the fingers. Then knit this last J in. in 
ribbing of k. 1, p. 1. Cast off, employing second method. 

2. BABY'S KNITTED COAT. 

New Pattern introduced. 

Materials. — Two Bone Needles — size 6 or 7. 1\ oz. of white 4-ply wool. Tota 
cost, employing wool at 5s. 3d. per lb. = lid. (For other qualities of 4-ply wool, 
see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The coat described below will fit a baby of six months old and 
over. If coarser needles are employed, a, larger coat may be produced by following 
the same instructions. The pattern described below looks well on either side, though 
the one selected for the right side in the photograph is the more ornamental. The 
appearance of the reverse side of the knitting is seen in the illustration in the small 
portion of the inside visible at the neck. 

Right Half Front. 

Cast on 36 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 5J in. of ribbed knitting 
without stretching. Employ second method described in General Instructions, as 
a firm edge is desirable. 

Knit 14 rows of knit 2, purl 2 ribbing, slipping the commencing stitch of every 
row after the first. 

\5th Row. — K. 1, * m. 1, k. 2 tog. ; repeat from * and knit the last stitch. 
This will produce a row of holes through which ribbon will be run. 

16th Row. — Knit plain. 

17th Row. — * K. 1, p. 1. Repeat from * to the end of the row. 

Repeat the 16th and 17th rows alternately until 8 in. of knitting has been 



STANDARD VII. 185 

done. Finish with a row of k. 1, p. 1. The 14 rows of ribbing at the bottom 
will be included in the 8 in. Now narrow to produce a shaped armhole as follows : — 

1st Row. — K. 2 tog., k. 2 tog., then knit plain all along the row. 

2nd Row. — * K. 1, p. 1. Repeat from * all along the row. 

3rd Row. — Like 1st row of armhole. 

4th Row. — Like 2nd row of armhole. 

5th Row. — Like 1st row of armhole. The stitches are now reduced to 30. 
Work eight more rows of the pattern on these 30 stitches, a row of k. 1, p. 1 
alternating with a row of plain knitting. 

At the commencement of the next row, which is a k. 1, p. 1 row, cast off 16 
stitches for the neck, leaving 14 for the shoulder. Knit 12 rows of the pattern 
on these 14 stitches, and then cast off. 

Left Half of Front. 

The left half of the front will be knitted in the same way as the right half, 
except for the following points : — 

(1) The narrowings for the armhole will be done at the end of a plain knitting 
row, instead of at the beginning. 

(2) The casting-off for the neck is done at the commencement of a plain knitting 
row, instead of at the beginning of a k. 1, p. 1 row. 

Back of Coat. 

Cast on 64 stitches, or as many as will give a width of 9J in. of ribbed knitting 
without stretching. Again employ second method of casting-on. 

Knit 14 rows of k. 2, p. 2 ribbing, slipping the commencing stitch of every 
row after the first. 

15th Row. — Like the 15th row of front. 

16th and 11th Rows. — Like the 16th and 17th rows of front. 

Repeat the 16th and 17th rows alternately, until 8 in. of knitting has been 
done. Finish with a row of k. 1, p. 1. Now narrow for the armholes as follows : — 

1st Row. — K. 2 tog., k. 2 tog., knit plain all along the row until last four stitches 
are reached. Then k. 2 tog., k. 2 tog. 

2nd Row. — K. 1, p. 1 all along row. 

3rd Row.-. — Like the 1st row of narrowing. The stitches are now reduced to 56. 

Knit 14 more rows of the pattern without further decreasings, and then cast 
off. 

Sleeves. 

Each sleeve is made as follows : Cast on 36 stitches. Knit 7 rows of k. 2, 
p. 2 ribbing to form the little turned-back cuff. 

Change now to alternate rows of plain knitting, and k. 1, p. 1, to produce the 
same pattern as in' fronts and back. Continue this pattern until 7 in. has been 
knitted altogether, including the k. 2, p. 2 for wrist. Finish with a k. 1, p. 1 row. 
Now narrow for the shaped top of the sleeve in the following manner : — 

1st Row. — K. 2 tog., knit plain all along row till the last two stitches are reached ; 
then k. 2 tog. 

2nd Row. — K. 2, p. 1, * k. 1, p. 1. Repeat from * all along the row, finishing 
■with 2 p. stitches. 

3rd Row. — Like 1st row of narrowing. 

4th Row. — K. 1, p. 1 all along row. Repeat these four rows three times more. 
There should now be 20 stitches on the needle. Cast off. 



186 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Making up. — Sew up the side seams of the coat, and also the sleeve seams, 
on the wrong side, as far as the armhole curves. Sew up the shoulders. Sew the 
sleeves into the armholes, putting the sleeve seam about 1 in. to the front of the 
under-arm seam. Crochet the following edging down both front pieces and round 
the neck : * Work 1 d.c. into a stitch, miss 1, 5 tr. into the next stitch, miss 1. 
Repeat from *. 

If desired, this border may also be worked round the turned-back cuffs of the 
sleeves. Run ribbon through the holes round the waist, and through the holes 
formed in the crochet edging round the top. (See Fig. 141.) 

3. BABY'S BOOTEES. 

Stitches Already Learned employed in Article of more Difficult 
Construction. 

Materials. — Two Steel Needles — size 14. 1 oz. of White Andalusian Wool will 
knit one pair. Cost, employing wool at 4s. 3d. per lb. = 3 Jd. (For other qualities 
of Andalusian wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — The Bootee described below will fit a baby of from four to eight 
months. 

Leg of Bootee. 

Commence at the top of the leg along GH by casting on 54 stitches, or as many 
as will produce the width required to fit the individual wearer. The number 
selected must be divisible by 2. 

Knit 10 rows, or J in., of k. 1, p. 1 ribbing, always slipping the commencing stitch 
of each row after the first. 

11/A Row. — Slip a stitch, * k. 1, m. 1 (by bringing wool forward under the 
point of the right-hand needle and over it again to the back), k. 2 tog. Repeat 
from *, knitting 2 stitches plain at the end of the row. 

12th, 13th, and Uth Rows.— Knit plain. 

15th Row. — The same as the 11th row. 

16th, Uth, and 18th Rows. — Knit plain. The dotted lines in Fig. 142 indicate 
the decorative pattern in holes in the leg portion. 

Rows 18 to 38. — 1£ in. of ribbed knitting of k. 1, p. 1. 

39th Row— Like 11th row. 

Rows 40, 41, and 42. — Knit plain. 

43rd Row. — Like 1 1th row. 

Rows 44, 45, and 46. — Knit plain. 

47th Row. — Like 11th row. 

Rows 48, 49, and 50. — Knit plain. 

51st Row. — Like 11th row. 

52nd Row. — Knit plain. 

53rd Row. — Commence to narrow for the ankle as follows : K. 12, k. 2 tog.. 
k. 12, k. 2 tog., k. 12, k. 2 tog., and knit the remaining 12. The stitches are now 
reduced to 51. 

54th Row. — Knit plain. 

55th Row. — Like 11th row. 

56th Roiv. — Knit plain. 



STANDARD VII. 187 

51th Row.r- Narrow again for the ankle as follows : K. 11, k. 2 tog., k. 11, 
K. I tog., k. 11, k. 2 tog., knit the remaining 12. The stitches are now reduced 
to 48. 



3* 



-li"-- 



NSTEP. 



LEG. 



G<- 



->H 



Fig. 142. Baby's Bootee. 
(Leg and Instep only.) 

58th Row. — Knit plain. 
59th Row.— Like 11th Row. 
60th Row. — Knit plain. 

Gist Row. — Narrow the last time, as follows : K. 11, k. 2 tog., k. 10, k. 2 tog., 
k. 10, k. 2 tog., and knit the remaining 11. The stitches are now reduced to 45. 
Rows 61 to 67. — Knit plain for \ in. 

Foot of Bootee. 

(a) Instep. — Commence knitting for the instep as follows : Pass the 15 stitches 
from A to B on to a piece of wool. (See Diagram.) Knit the next 15 stitches plain. 



188 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

and then pass the stitches from C to D on to a second piece of wool. Now turn 
the work round, and do plain knitting backwards and forwards on the 15 stitches 
from C to B until 44 rows, or 2 in., have been knitted for the instep. Break off 
the wool, leaving an end which must be darned in strongly and neatly afterwards. 
Leave the 15 stitches standing, for the present, on the instep needle. 




Baby's 



(6) Lower part of foot. — Now arrange the stitches for the sole of the foot as 
follows : On another knitting needle take up the 15 stitches on the wool from 
A to B ; next take up the 22 loops or stitches along the right-hand side of the instep, 
from B to E ; slip on to the same needle the 15 stitches from E to F which were 
left standing from the instep ; take up the 22 stitches along the left-hand side of the 
instep from F to C, and finally take up the 15 stitches left on the wool from C to D. 
This rather difficult operation will bring 89 stitches all on one needle. Join on 
the wool at the commencement of this needle, and work as follows : — 



STANDARD VII. 189' 

1st, 2nd, 3rd, and 4th Rows. — Knit plain. 

5th Row.—K. 37, k. 2 tog., k. 11, k. 2 tog., k. 37. This reduces the stitches 
_to 87. 

6th Row. — Knit plain. 

7th Row. — K. 37, k. 2 tog., k, 9, k. 2 tog., k. 37. This reduces the stitches 
to 85. 

8th Row. — Knit plain. 

9th Row.—K. 37, k. 2 tog., k. 7, k. 2 tog., k. 37. This reduces the stitches 
to 83. 

10th Row. — Knit plain. 

Uth Row.—K. 37, k. 2 tog., k. 5, k. 2 tog., k. 37. The stitches will now 
number 81. 

12th Row. — Knit plain. 

13th Row.—K. 37, k. 2 tog., k. 3, k. 2 tog., k. 37. The stitches are 79 in number 

14th Row. — Knit plain. 

15th Row.—K. 37, k. 2 tog., k. 1, k. 2 tog., k. 37. The stitches now number 77 

16th Row. — Knit plain. 

17*A Row. — K. 37, k. 2 tog., k. 38. The stitches now number 76. 

18th Row. — Knit 76 plain. 

19th Row.—K. 2, k. 2 tog., k. 32, k. 2 tog., k. 2 tog., k. 32, k. 2 tog., k. 2. 
Stitches now number 72. 

20th Row. — Knit plain. 

21st Row. — K. 2, k. 2 tog., k. 30, k. 2 tog., k. 2 tog., k. 30, k. 2 tog., k. 2.. 
Stitches now number 68. 

22nd Row. — Knit plain. 

23rd Row.—K. 2, k. 2 tog., k. 28, k. 2 tog., k. 2 tog., k. 28, k. 2 tog., k. 2.. 
Stitches now number 64. 

24th Row. — Knit plain, and then cast off. 

Making up. — Sew the little bootee neatly together on the wrong side. Run 
ribbons through the holes at the ankle and the holes near the top of the leg. Tie- 
the ribbons with bows in front. 

4. BABY'S ORNAMENTAL SILK SOCK. 

Difficult Knitting Pattern introduced, suitable only for the most- 
Advanced Scholars. 

Materials. — Four Steel Needles — size 17. Two balls D.M.C. " Coton Perle '' — - 
No. 8. Cost = 4d. 

Instructions. — This sock fits a child of about one year. 
Cast on 68 stitches. 

Welt. 

Knit 30 rounds of ribbing, k. 2, p. 2. 

Leg. 

1st Round. — Knit plain, but make two additional stitches at some distance - 
from each other, to bring the number up to 70, as the number of stitches for this, 
pattern must be divisible by 14. 

2nd Round. — Plain. 

3rd Round. — * P. 1, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass slip stitch over the knit stitch, p. 4,. 
k. 2, p. 2, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 



-190 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

4th Round. — * P. 1, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass slip stitch over the knit stitch, p. 3, 
k. 2, p. 2, k. 3, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

5th Round.—* P. 1, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, p. 2, k. 2, p. 2, 
k. 1, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, k. 1, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 




Fig. 144. Baby's Ornamental Silk Sock. 

6th Round. — * P. 1, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, p. 1, k. 2, p. 2, 
k. 5, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

1th Round. — * P. 1, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, k. 2, p. 2, k. 2, 
m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, k. 2, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

8th Round. — * P. 1, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, k. 1, p. 2, k. 7, 
p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

9th Round. — * P. 1, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, p. 2, k. 3, m. 1, 
k. 1, m. 1, k. 3, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 



STANDARD VII. 191 

10th Round. — * P. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, p. 2, k. 9, p. 1. Repeat 
Jrom * all round. 

11th Round.—* P. 1, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, p. 2, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch 
over, p. 1, k. 5, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

12th Round. — * P. 1, k. 3, p. 2, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, p. 1, 
k. 4, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

13th Round.—* P. 1, k. 1, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, k. 1, p. 2, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the 
slip stitch over, p. 1, k. 3, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

Uth Round. — * P. 1, k. 5, p. 2, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, p. 1, 
k. 2, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

15th Round.—* P. 1, k. 2, m. 1, k. 1, m. 1, k. 2, p. 2, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the 
slip stitch over, p. 1, k. 1, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

16th Round. — * P. 1, k. 7, p. 2, k. 1, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, k. 1, 
p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

17th Round.—* P. 1, k. 3,' in. 1, k.- 1, m. 1, k. 3, p. 2, k. 1, «. 1, k. 1, pass the 
slip stitch over, p. 1. Repeat from * all round. 

18th Round. — * P. 1, k. 9, p. 2, s. 1, k. 1, pass the slip stitch over, p. 1. Repeat 
from * all round. 

The last 16 rounds form the lyre pattern. Repeat this pattern 3£ more times, 
and the heel will be reached. 

"The Heel. 

Arrange the first 29 stitches of the round on one needle for the heel. On these, 
knit a Dutch Heel as described in the rules for knitting and turning heels. (See 
under 6 (a), St. V.) In preparation for the foot take up 15 stitches on each side 
of the heel. (For full description of this process, see under 6 (b), St. V.) 

Arrangement of Stitches for Foot. 

One side needle. — 5 of the stitches left on the heel needle +14 stitches taken up 
along the side of the heel. 

The other side needle. — 4 stitches from the heel needle + 15 stitches taken up 
along the other side of the heel. 

Front or Instep needle. — 39 remaining stitches + 1 stitch at the end of the 
needle from the 15 taken up along the side of the heel. 

Decreasings of Foot. 

1st Round. — Front needle. In the case of this needle, the pattern will be 
continued right up to the decreasings for the toe. The two side needles — plain. 

2nd Round. — Front needle. Pattern continued. 

First side needle. — K. 1, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the end. 

Second side needle. — Knit till only 3 stitches remain on the needle, k. 2 tog., 
k. 1. Repeat the above two rounds alternately until only 15 stitches remain 
upon each of the side needles. (In the case of each decreasing on the first side 
needle, the " Pulling-over " method of decreasing may be employed. See General 
Instructions.) 

Straight Portion of Foot. 

Continue without further decreasings until the pattern has been repeated 
2J times from the commencement of the foot. 

Decreasings at Toe. 

■■■ f Place half of the total number of stitches on the front needle,- and half on the 

two back needles. Discontinue, the pattern. 



192 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

1st Round. — K. 1, k. 2 tog., knit plain until only 3 st. remain on the front 
needle, k. 2 tog., k. 1. K. 1 stitch of first back needle, k. 2 tog., knit plain to the 
end. Knit along second back needle until only 3 st. remain, k. 2 tog., k. 1. 
(In the case of the first decreasing of each pair, the " Pulling-over " method may 
be used.) 

Next 2 Rounds. — Plain. 

Repeat the above three rounds sevei times more. Then narrow similarly, in 
alternate rounds, until 9 stitches remain on the front needle, and also on the two 
back needles together. Cast off as follows : — 

Turn the sock wrong side out, and put the stitches from the two back needles 
all on to one needle. Knit 2 stitches together, one from the back and one from 
the front needle ; knit another 2 together in the same manner ; pass the first 
resulting stitch over the second ; knit 2 together as before, and continue the pro- 
cess as described until only one stitch remains on the needle. Break off the wool, 
draw it through, and fasten off neatly. For " Grafting Off," see General 
Instructions. 

5. CROCHETED EGG-COSY. 

New Pattern taught ; Practice in the Choice of Suitable Colours for 
Blending. 
Materials. — Bone Crochet Hook of medium size. Single Berlin Wool of two 
shades. 1 oz. of wool will make three cosies. The cost of three cosies will thus 
be about 3£d. 




Fig. 145. Crocheted Egg-Cosy. 

Instructions. — Commence with the darkest shade of wool. Work 22 chain rather 
loosely, and join to form a ring. The chain should measure about 7 in. in length. If 



STANDARD VII. 



193 



finer or coarser wool be employed, vary the number of chain accordingly, but let 
the number of stitches selected be divisible by 2. 

1st Row. — Work 3 chain (to count as a treble), and 3 tr. into the first St., take 
out the hook, insert it in the top of the first tr. [i.e., through the top of the 3 ch. 
which form the first tr.), and draw the last stitch through it (see Fig. 147 for 
enlarged illustration of stitch). 1 tr. into the next st., *4 tr. into next st. (as 
before, drawing the last stitch through the top of the first tr.), 1 tr. into next st. 
Repeat from * all round the ring. There will be 1 1 sets of 4 tr. and 1 1 single tr. 
Join the last tr. to the first set of 4 tr. by a single stitch, thus completing the ring. 

2nd Row. — 3 chain to form a single treble, and 3 tr. into first hole (as before, 
draw the last st. through the top of the first of the set of 4 tr.), 1 tr. into next hole. 
* 4 tr. into next hole (again drawing last st. through top of first), 1 tr. into next hole. 
Repeat from * all the way round. 




Fig. 146. Method of Working in Crocheted Egg-Cosy. 

Repeat the second row four times more, or for as many rows as are required 
of the darker shade. Break off the wool. Join on with the lighter shade. (See 
General Instructions.) Work three rows in this shade, or a sufficient number to 
make the work 3£ in. in height. 

Now close in the top of the egg-cosy as follows : Work 1 d.c. into each hole 
all the way round, drawing each stitch rather tightly. Flatten the cosy, and join 
together the tops of these d.c.'s by a row of single stitch to form the closed top 
of the cosy. 

Before breaking off the wool, make a little handle as follows : Make 12 ch., 
carry the end of this chain across to the other corner of the closed top, and secure 
it by a single stitch. Now thicken this handle by working a d.c. into each st. of 
the chain. Secure this end also to the opposite end of the top of the cosy by a 
single st. Break off the wool, and darn the end in neatly. 

jV § p. The cosy can be worked in one shade of wool only, or in three shades. 

If three shades are employed, the bottom three rows should be in the darkest 
shade, the middle three in the medium, and the top three in the palest shade. 

13— (815E) 



194 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 
6. CROCHETED TEA-COSY. 



Further Practice in Egg-Cosy Pattern, and in the Choice of Artistic 
Colours for Blending. 

Materials. — Coarse Bone Crochet Hook. Double Berlin Wool ofj six shades. 
6 oz. will make two cosies. The cost of two cosies, employing wool at 4s. 6d. 
per lb., is Is. 9d. 




Fig. 147. Crocheted Tea Cosy. 



Instructions. — Commence with the darkest shade of wool. Work 36 chain rather 
loosely, and join to form a ring. The chain should measure 18 in. If a cosy of a 
different size is required, let the number of chain selected be divisible by 4. See note 
at the end. 

1st Row. — Work 3 ch. (to count as a tr.) and 3 tr. into the first st. — take out 
the hook, insert it in the top of the first tr. (i.e., through the top of the 3 ch. which 
form the first tr.), and draw the last st. through it, 1 tr. into the next St., * 4 tr. 
into next st. (as before, drawing the last st. through top of first tr.), 1 tr. into next 
st. Repeat from * all round the ring. There will be 18 sets of 4 tr., and 18 single 
tr. Join the last tr. to the first set of 4 tr. by a single stitch, thus completing 
the ring. 

2nd Row. — 3 ch. to form a single tr., and 3 tr. into first hole (as before, draw 
the last st. through top of first of the set of 4 tr.), 1 tr. into next hole, * 4 treble 
into next hole (again drawing the last stitch through the top of first tr.), 1 tr. into 



Cutting Out for Student Teachers 

By AMY K. SMITH 

Diplomee of the London Institute for the Advancement of Plain Needlework ; Spe- 
cialist under the London County Council and at the Day Training College, Moor- 
fields ; Examiner in Dressmaking and Needlework to the City and Guilds of London 

Institute ; late of St. Gabriel's College, Kennington, S.E. 
The book contains upwards of 260 pages, Quarto size, and is illustrated with over 

360 Diagrams. Price 5s. net. 
The Schoolmistress says : " The book is profusely illustrated, and affords every 
conceivable help to those for whom it is written. We can most heartily 
recommend it." 

Needlework for Student Teachers 

(FOR ALL TEACHERS AND STUDENTS OF THE SUBJECT) 
By the Same Author. 
The book contains 260 pages, demy Svo, and is illustrated with upwards of 
200 illustrations. It has recently been revised, rearranged, and repaged. Price 

4s. net. 
The Schoolmaster says : "A most exhaustive manual, the style being in advance 
of any work on the subject we have hitherto seen." 

Blackboard Diagram Drawing for 
Teachers of Needlecraft 

By ETHEI R. HAMBRIDGE 

Trained Certificated Teacher ; Art Teacher's Certificate ; Diplombe (Gold Seat) of 

the London Institute for the Advancement of Plain Needlework. 
Foolscap 4to, cloth, with 7 full-page coloured plates and nearly 300 black and white 

illustrations and diagrams, 3s. 6d. net. 
This work is not only a useful collection of diagrams, but contains as many practical 
hints as to their effective enlargement on the blackboard for class teaching ; and 
should prove most valuable, not only to the Evening School Teacher in training, 
but, also, to those who are actually engaged in teaching the various subjects included 
under the heading of Needlecraft. The diagrams are carefully graded. 

Handwork and Needlework 

By E. P. CLAYDON 

Head Mistress Chuckery Council School, Walsall. 
In demy Svo, cloth, 96 pages, with very many diagrams and patterns, 2s. net. 

This book embodies in a practical form the suggestions for the teaching of needle- 
work recently issued by the Board of Education in Circular 730. The educational 
value of Needlework as a form of Handicraft for girls is specially dealt with. The 
drafting of patterns is not confined to a few garments for girls in the higher standards, 
but forty-eight- patterns to scale are given, graded in difficulty for children from 
7 to 14 years of age. 

London : Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons, Ltd., 1 Amen Corner, E.C. 



STANDARD VII. 195 

next hole. Repeat from * all the way round. Break off the wool, leaving an end 
about 3 in. long for fastening off. This starts the opening for the handle. 

3rd Row. — Join on the next shade lighter, make 3 ch. into hole in front of set 
of 4 tr. (this counts as a tr.), * 4 tr. into next hole, worked as in previous rows, 1 tr. 
into next hole. Repeat from * half-way round the ring, finishing with 1 tr. There 
will be 9 sets of 4 tr. and 10 single tr., counting the 3 ch. at the commencement 
as 1 tr. Break off the wool to form the opening for the spout. Join on again in 
next hole, make 3 ch., and work exactly as in the first half of the row, but, at the 
end, after working the 4 tr., the single tr. must be put into the same hole as the 
last 4 tr. Break off the wool. 

4th Row. — Commence with 3 ch. into first hole to count as a tr., and also 4 tr. 
into first hole, * 1 tr. into second hole, 4 tr. into third hole. (Notice that in this 
row the single tr. comes first, and the 4 tr. comes second. This is necessary to 
keep the edges of the cosy straight.) Repeat from * along the first half of the 
row, finishing with a single tr. Break off the wool. The second half of the row 
is worked in the same way as the first. Each half of this row and every succeeding 
one must have 9 sets of 4 tr. in it. 

5th Row. — Join on the next shade lighter. Work as 3rd row. At the end 
of each half-row, a single tr. must be put into the last hole, as well as the 4 tr. 

6th Row. — Like the 4th row. 

1th Row. — Join on next shade. Work as 5th row. 

8th Row. — Join on next shade. Work as 4th row. 

9th Row. — Join on next shade. Work as 5th row. Do not break off the 
wool, but join the end of the 9th row with the beginning by a single stitch into 
the top of the first tr. 

10th Row. — 3 ch. to form a tr., then 1 tr. into each hole all the way round. 
Join the last tr. to the first (i.e., the 3 ch.) This row forms a beading for drawing 
up the cosy. 

11th Row. — This commences the border. With the same wool * work 6 ch., 
miss a hole, 1 d.c. into next hole. Repeat from * all round the top. Break off 
the wool. 

12th Row. — -Join on a darker shade, just where the 11th row commenced. 
"Work 6 ch., make 1 d.c. into the same hole as previous row. Repeat all the 
way round as in 1 1th row. A third row of loops may be worked in a still darker 
shade if desired, making a triple border. Draw up the cosy with ribbon, or by 
means of a crocheted woollen chain with tassels attached to the ends. 

N.B. — The Cosy described above will fit a teapot holding 1£ pts. If a larger 
size is required, increase the length of the chain by four, or by any multiple of four, 
and also increase the number of rows. 

A Coffee Pot Cosy may be worked in a similar pattern to the Egg and Teapot 
Cosies, varying the size and shape as required. 

7(a). CROCHETED PERAMBULATOR COVER. 

Stitches Already Learned Applied to Crocheting an Article Larger than 
those Previously Made. 
Materials. — A Bone Crochet Hook — large size. About 12 oz. Cream or White 
Double Knitting Coat Wool. Cost, using wool at 3s. lid. per lb. = 3s. (exclusive 
of ribbon). (For other qualities of double knitting wool, see under Woolcraft.) 



196 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Instructions. — Make a sufficient number of chain to extend the length of the 
cover required, remembering that extra stitches must be allowed for the turn-back 
portion. The number chosen should be divisible by 11. In the case of the one 
photographed, it was 132 chain, and the length measured 36 in. 

1st Row.—* 1 tr. into each of the first 9 ch. miss 2 st. ; repeat from * to the 
end of the chain made. In every case the back of the stitch is to be taken up, 



Fig. 148. Crocheted Perambulator Cover. 

so that the whole rug has a ridged appearance when completed. Break off 
the wool, leaving an end which is to be neatly finished off on the wrong side of 
the rug. 

2nd Row. — Beginning at the same end and on the same side as was done in the 
previous row, miss 1 St., * 1 tr. into each of the next 3 st., 3 tr. into next st., 1 tr. 
into each of the next 3 St., miss 2 st., repeat from * to the end of the row. Break 
off the wool as before. This is done at the end of each row in order that all the rows 



STANDARD VII. 197 

may be started at the same end and on the same side of the rug. All the ridges 
produced then stand out on the right side. 

Continue to work rows like the 2nd row described above until the cover is of 
the width required. In the case of the one shown in Fig. 148, the number of rows 
was 36, and the width was 27 in. Neatly finish off all ends on the wrong side, 
remembering that, in the case of the turned-back portion, the sides will be reversed. 

Border. 

Commence in the first stitch of one of the long sides. Join on ; make 3 ch. 
(to serve as 1 tr.), and 5 tr. into the first stitch, ch. 2, 1 d.c. into the fifth or middle 
stitch of the first group of 9, ch. 2, 6 tr. into the hole left between the first two 
groups of 9, * ch. 2, 1 d.c. into the middle stitch of the next group, ch. 2, 6 tr. 
into the hole between the next two groups ; repeat from * all round the rug. In 
working along the ends it will be necessary to judge the spaces between the groups 
of trebles, as there will be no holes to serve as a guide. 

Finish off the cover by running ribbon through the rows of holes that go 
across it, making little bows at the corners. 

7(B). CROCHETED COT COVER. 

Materials. — Large Bone Crochet Hook. 1 lb. 5 oz. of Double Knitting Wool. 
Cost, employing wool at 3s. lid. per lb. = 5s. 2d. 

Instructions. — Employ the same pattern as that described above under Peram- 
bulator Cover. Make the cover about 35 in. wide, and 50 in. long. To ascertain 
the exact dimensions required, measure the cot for which the cover is intended. 

7(c). CROCHETED SOFA RUG. 

Materials. — Large Bone Crochet Hook. If lb. of Double Knitting Wool. Cost, 
employing wool at 3s. lid. per lb. = 6s. lid. 

Instructions. — Again employ the same pattern as for the Perambulator Cover. 
Make the rug about If yds. long and 1 yd. wide. To ascertain its exact size, measure 
the sofa for which it is required, and allow a convenient margin. 

8. CROCHETED HUG-ME-TIGHT. 

New Pattern taught. 

Materials. — A Large Bone Crochet Hook. 6 oz. of 4-ply wool. Three Pearl 
Buttons. Cost, using wool at 3s. 2d. per lb. = Is. 4d. (For other qualities of 
4-ply wool, see under Woolcraft.) 

Instructions. — Back. The work is commenced at the bottom of the back along 
the line marked AB in the diagram. Chain 72, or a length to produce crocheting 
measuring 10 in. 

1st Row. — * Miss 4 ch., 2 tr. into next stitch, chain 2, 2 tr. into next stitch. 
Repeat from * all along the row. There should be in all 12 groups, each consisting 
of 2 tr., 2 ch., 2 tr. 

2nd Row. — Turn with 3 ch. which will count as 1 tr., 1 tr. into the first stitch 
of the row. (The 3 chain and the treble will form half a group, and another half 

13A— (8l5B) 



198 



KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 



group will be made at the end of the row, so that the 12 groups which form each 
row shall be completed), 2 tr. into the hole formed between the two last groups 




Fig. 149. Crocheted Hug-Me-Tight. 

of the previous row, 2 ch., 2 tr. into the same hole, * 2 tr. into the next hole 
between two groups, 2 ch., 2 tr. into the same hole. Repeat from * all along the 



STANDARD VII. 19& 

row, and then work 2 tr. on the very last stitch of the row. These 2 tr. form the 
half group previously mentioned. 




Fig. 150. Hug-Me-Tight or Woollen Waistcoat in Crochet. 
Front View. 

3rd Row. — Work with single stitch until the first hole between groups is reached. 
Then chain 3 to serve as a treble, 1 tr. into the hole, 2 ch., 2 tr. into the same hole ; 
* 2 tr. into the next hole, 2 ch., 2 tr. into the same hole. Repeat from * all along 
the row. There should be 12 complete groups in this row as in the first row. 



200 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

Now repeat the 2nd and 3rd rows alternately until 14 rows have been done 
in all. 

15th Row. — In this row an increase is made as follows : Work two groups of 
trebles as usual, but when the third hole is reached, work into it 6 tr. with 2 ch. 
between each of the pairs, instead of the usual 4 tr. ; then make the groups as 
usual into all the other holes until the tenth hole is reached ; work into this a 
similar group to that worked into the third hole. Complete the row in the usual 
way. 

IQth Row. — In this row work an additional group into each of the two groups of 
six trebles made in the previous row, by making a cluster into each of the holes 
formed by 2 chain. All the other groups in the row will be worked as usual, so that 
there will now be 14 groups in the row. 

Now continue to work these longer rows of 14 groups until 35 rows, or 12 in., 
have been worked in all. This completes the back. 

Right Shoulder and Front. 

Work 5 groups of the 36th row, and then turn round and work back along 
these 5 groups. Continue working these short rows until 15 rows, each consisting 
of 5 groups, have been worked. 

IQth Row. — The first increasing for the front is made in this row. Wore 3 
groups of trebles in the usual way, but, when the fourth hole is reached, work 
6 trebles into it as described in the increasings of the back. Work the fifth group 
in the usual way. 

nth Row. — In this row work an additional group into the group of 6 trebles, 
by making a group in each of the holes formed by 2 chain. There will now be 

6 groups in the row. Work 6 more rows each consisting of 6 groups. 

2Ath Row. — Increase again as before. Then work 7 rows of 7 groups. 
32nd Row. — Increase again in exactly the same way as in the 16th row. Work 

7 rows with 8 groups in each row, or as many as will make up a length of 15 in. from 
the commencement of the shoulder. This completes the right front as far as the 
line DC of diagram. 

Left Shoulder and Front. 

Work this on exactly the same principle as the right shoulder and front until 
the line FE is reached. As in the case of the right front, the increasings should 
be made near the ends of the rows, farthest from the armhole. 

Border. 

By means of the border, the jacket may be adapted to suit a stout or slim figure 
For a slim figure as few as two rows of the border may be worked, and for a stout 
figure as many as six rows. The hug-me-tight shown in the photograph is made 
to suit a figure with an outside waist measurement of 26 in., and the border for 
this size consists of four rows, i.e., 1£ in. 

1st Row. — Two d.c. into the hole formed by the 2 chain in the middle of the 
first group, * 3 chain, 2 d.c. into the hole in the middle of the next group. Repeat 
from * round the whole of the jacket as indicated by the dotted line in the diagram. 
Repeat the 2 d.c. twice into the hole at each of the corners. 

2nd Row. — Three tr. into each of the holes formed by the 3 ch. of previous 
row, and 2 ch. between each group of 3 tr. Repeat the 3 tr. twice in the hole 



STANDARD VII. 201 

at each of the corners. In working along the back of the neck, draw in the work 
by making 1 ch. instead of 2 ch. between each group of 3 tr. 

3rd Row. — Like last row, placing a group of 3 tr. into each of the holes formed 
by the 2 chain. 

4th Row. — * Two tr. into a hole, 2 chain, 2 tr. into the same hole. Repeat 
from * all round the hug-me-tight. 




Fig. 151. Hug-Me-Tight or Woollen Waistcoat in Crochet. 
Back View. (Reduced Scale.) 

Making up. — Fold the garment so that the point K lies over the point G, and 
the point J over the point H, and sew up the side seams on the wrong side of the 
garment, for a sufficient distance to leave convenient openings for the armholes. 
Turn the garment on to the right side and sew three buttons on the left-hand 
side of the front opening at its lower end. The holes formed by the pattern of 
the border may be used as button-holes. 



202 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

9. FIRST LACE EDGING IN CROCHET. (FOR TRIMMING 
UNDERWEAR, AND FANCY ARTICLES.) 

Simple Pattern in Crochet Cotton taught. 

Materials. — Steel Crochet Hook — size 5. Crochet Cotton, No. 24. 

Instructions. — Commence with 7 chain. 

1st Row. — Turn with 8 chain, 1 tr. into the 7th chain, (i.e., into the last of 
the foundation chain), 3 ch., 1 tr. into same stitch, 3 ch., miss 2, 1 tr. into next 
St., 3 ch., miss 2, 1 tr. into first stitch of chain. 

2nd Row. — Turn with 6 ch., 1 tr. on top of last treble but one in previous row, 
3 ch., 1 tr. on next tr., 5 tr. into space, and 1 tr. into next tr. (thus making a group 
of 7 tr.), 3 ch. and 1 tr. into the 3rd of the group of chain at the commencement 
of the previous row. 




Fig. 152. First Lace Edging in Crochet. 

3rd Row. — Turn with 6 ch., 1 tr. on to the first tr. of the group of 7 tr., 3 ch. 
and 1 tr. into the same st., 3 ch. 1 tr. on to the middle of the 7 tr., 3 ch. 1 tr. on 
to the last of the 7 tr. 

Repeat the second and third rows alternately, until the desired length has been 
obtained. 

10. SECOND LACE EDGING IN CROCHET. 

More Difficult Pattern taught. 

Materials. — Steel Crochet Hook — size 5. Crochet Cotton, No. 24. 

Instructions. — Commence with 10 chain. 

1st Row. — Turn with 5 ch., work 3 tr. into the 10th ch., (i.e., into the last of 
the foundation chain), miss 2 ch., * 3 tr. into next ch., miss 2, and repeat from *. 
This results in four sets of 3 tr. 

2nd Row. — Turn with 5 ch., make a d.c. into space between the two last sets 
of trebles in the previous row, * make 5 ch. and a d.c. into next space. Repeat 
from *. This results in four sets of 5 ch. In attaching the last 5 ch., pass the 
hook through the middle stitch of the 5 ch. of the previous row. Do this in every 
row which ends with 5 ch. in order to produce a firm and regular edge. 

3rd Row. — Turn with 5 ch., make a d.c. into first hole, * 5 ch. and a d.c. into 



STANDARD VII. 203 

next hole. Repeat from *. This makes four sets of 5 ch. Now make 6 ch., and 
attach with a d.c. into the hole where the last set of 4 tr. was placed in the 1st row 
of the pattern. 

4th Row. — Turn round, and work 3 tr. and a d.c. three times in succession 
into this ch. of 6. This forms the edge of the pattern. Work 5 ch. and a d.c. 
into each succeeding space. 




Fig. 153. Second Lace Edging in Crochet. 

5th Row. — Turn with 5 ch., and work 3 tr. into each space of the preceding 
row, thus producing four sets of tr. as in the 1st row. 

Repeat from the commencement of the 2nd row, until the desired length has 
been worked. 

ii. THIRD LACE EDGING IN CROCHET. 

Harder Alternative Pattern. 

Materials. — Steel Crochet Hook — size 5. Crochet Cotton, No. 24. 




Fig. 154. Third Lace Edging in Crochet. 

Instructions. — Commence with 12 ch. 

1st Row. — Turn with 3 ch. to form a tr., 1 tr. into 12th ch. (i.e., into the last 
of the foundation ch.), 1 tr. into 11th ch., ch. 2, miss 2 ch., 1 tr. into 8th ch., 1 tr., 
1 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr. into the 7th ch., miss 2 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr. 



204 KNITTING WITHOUT SPECIMENS. 

into 4th ch., miss 2 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr. into 1st stitch of foundation 
chain. 

2nd Row. — Make 5 ch., and work a single crochet (see General Instructions) 
into the first of these 5 ch. Repeat this 5 ch. and single cr. into the first of the 
chain, twice more. (This forms three picots and makes an edging to the lace.) 
Work 1 d.c. into first space in preceding row, 3 ch., 1 d.c. into next space, miss 
next hole (which comes between two sets of 3 tr.), 3 ch. and 1 d.c. into each of 
tne next two spaces, miss next hole, 3 ch. and 1 d.c. into each of the next two 
spaces (making five sets of 3 ch.), 1 tr. on the tr. in previous row, 2 ch., 1 tr. on 
each of the 3 tr. of 1st row. 

3rd Row. — Turn with 3 ch. to form a tr., 1 tr. on each of the next 2 tr. of pre- 
ceding row, 2 ch., 1 tr. on next tr., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr. into hole formed 
by 3 ch. in previous row, miss the next 3 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr. into 
next hole, miss next 3 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr., 1 ch., 1 tr. into the last hole formed 
by 3 ch. 

Repeat second and third rows until the desired length has been obtained. 



THE END 



Press o/ Isaac Pitman 6- Sons, Bath, England 
Q— (8I5B) 



Practical Plain Needlework 

By ANNIE B. CHAMBERLAIN, B.A., (Lond.) 

DiplomSe of the London Institute for the Advancement of Plain Needlework ; 
Needlework Instructress in the City of Nottingham Pupil Teachers' Centre. 

Foolscap 4to, cloth, 212 pp., fully illustrated with diagrams in two colours, 3s. fid. not. 

This Manual is intended for the use of teachers of Needlework in Elementary, 
Secondary, and Evening Continuation Schools, and of students preparing for the 
Needlework Examinations of the Board of Education. It is based on all the latest 
circulars issued by the Board. Directions for the cutting out, making, and mending- 
of actual garments are a prominent feature of the book ; there is a wide range of 
simple and up-to-date patterns cut out by proportion, with full instructions for 
adapting them to give figure measurements as required in practical work and in the- 
recent examinations of the Board of Education. 

Notes of Lessons on Pattern Drafting 

By JOSEPHINE RILEY 

Needlework Lecturer to the Teachers' Classes under the London 
County Council. 

Foolscap 4to, cloth, with 35 full-page diagrams, 128 pp. 
Price 2s. 6d. net. 

In this volume the author aims at presenting a recognised system correlated with 
Art ; and graduated for standards on educational lines. It includes Class lessons 
in Pattern Drafting, in Cutting Out in the Material, in the Making-up of the Gar- 
ments according to the ability of each class, e.g., Cutting Out and Making a Doll's. 
Cloak ; a Simple Dress ; a Child's Pinafore, Petticoat Bodice, Chemise, Princess. 
Petticoat ; Drill Knickers ; the " Magyar Overall " ; Girl's Nightdress ; Cooking; 
Apron ; Overall ; Gored Skirt ; Swimming Costume, etc. 

Needlework Manuals for Upper 
Standards and Evening Schools 

By FLORENCE SHAW 

Head Mistress Newgate Council School, Pontefract. 

In Five Books, each 24 pp., paper, with illustrations in two colours. Price 3d. net.. 

Including drafting of patterns, cutting-out, fitting, and making up of various 
garments. No. 1. Blouse-making. No. 2. Skirt-making. No. 3. Cooking- 
Apron, Overall, etc. Nos. 4 and 5. Under-garments. The directions con- 
tained in these books, which are written according to the requirements of the Board 
of Education, are simple and concise, and may safely be given to young students 
of 14 or 15. 

London : Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons, Ltd., 1 Amen Corner, E.C 



The Story of Girlie Bunting on the 
Island of "Never-Mind-Where" 

By ETHEL R. HAMBRIDGE 

Trained Certificated Teacher; Lecturer to Teachers; Diplomee {Gold Seal) of the 
London Institute for the Advancement of Plain Needlework, and of the National 
Training School of Cookery and other Branches of Domestic Economy in Millinery 
and Elementary and Advanced Dressmaking. Author of " Blackboard Diagram 
Drawing for Teachers of Needlecraft." 

Inscribed by kind permission to Mr. Rudyard Kipling. 

In crown 8vo, cloth, with many quaint illustrations, 120 pp. Is. 3d. 

The Author has struck a most original note in the production of Girlie Bunting, 
for it introduces the child-student of Needlework to her subject on the lines of a 
delightful story. Step by step, as the tale unfolds, the child is taken through 
the various stages of the work, and even the smallest point has not been omitted. 
The young student will also grasp in a most attractive manner the nature and use 
of all her workbox implements. A knowledge gained in this interesting way is 
likely to remain permanently in the mind. The little heroine, Girlie Bunting, is 
certain to prove very fascinating, and the reader, while enjoying her adventures, 
will, in addition, absorb almost unconsciously a very thorough preliminary instruc- 
tion in Needlework and Dressmaking. The book will be greatly valued in both 
Elementary and Secondary Schools. 



Knitting for Infants and Juniors 

By ETHEL M. DUDLEY, L.L.A. 

Sheil Road Council School, Liverpool. 
"With a Foreword by Miss S. J. HALE, Principal of the Edge Hill Training College, 

Liverpool. 

In foolscap 4to, cloth, 64 pp., with over 40 illustrations. 2s. net. 

Knitting lessons in the Infants' School frequently have a tendency to monotony 
and tediousness, because it is generally supposed that so little of any practical use 
can be accomplished by the tiny fingers. This book shows what may be done, as 
soon as the simple plain knitting stitch is conquered, in the way of making tiny 
garments for a doll, or small articles for a doll's house or for " Mother." Part I 
is entirely devoted to the work of Infants and Standard I, all patterns being based 
upon the ordinary plain knitting, or garter, stitch. Part II is more advanced,' 
requiring the added knowledge of how to work a purl stitch, and is suitable for all 
classes of the Junior School. The illustrations consist of photographs and drawings, 
the photographs in Part I being of actual articles made by children in the " Sixes " 
Class ; that is, by children from 5 to 6J years of age. 

London : Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons, Ltd., 1 Amen Corner, E.C.